JP2016013428A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can mitigate the discomfort of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided with a passage port having an opening through which a game ball enters, and distribution means which can alternately distribute the game ball having passed through the passage port into a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port. The game machine includes determination means which, on the basis of the game ball having passed through the passage port, determines whether the game ball having passed through the passage port is distributed by the distribution means into the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port, first notification means which notifies a first notification mode based on the determination result from the determination means, and second notification means which changes the first notification mode on the basis of the game ball having entered the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the winning of a game medium at the entrance, a winning notification is made by outputting a winning sound or the like, and whether or not the winning is determined.

  For the purpose of distributing the flow of the game medium to the entrance, there is one in which an introduction channel for introducing the game medium to the entrance is provided.

  For example, in a gaming machine equipped with two types of entrances, it is possible to alternate the winning of game media to the two types of entrances by sorting in the introduction channel. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of preventing a ball from entering one side of the mouth.

JP 2012-231902 A

  However, in a gaming machine configured so that the player cannot visually recognize the inside of the introduction channel, the player cannot visually recognize the winning of the game medium to the entrance provided in the introduction channel, There is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable because the winning is notified by outputting the winning sound based on the game medium winning at the entrance.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a player's uncomfortable feeling.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the game ball having entered the mouth and the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, and the establishment of the lottery condition , A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on the display means for a predetermined time, Dynamic display means for displaying, storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. Based on the display of the identification information indicating that there is a player, A bonus game granting means for granting an advantageous bonus game, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening and the first ball entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game unit that has passed through the passing port can be distributed to the second entrance by the distributing unit. Discriminating means for discriminating between the ball entrance and the second entrance, first informing means for informing a first notification mode based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the first entrance Or it has a 2nd alerting | reporting means which changes a said 1st alerting | reporting aspect based on the game ball having entered into the said 2nd entrance.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, when the first notification means notifies the first notification mode, the first notification mode has elapsed for a predetermined time or more. When the second notification means does not change the second notification mode, the first notification mode is set to a non-notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball at the first entrance. The acquisition means that acquires the first information based on having entered the ball and the second information that acquires the second information based on the ball that has entered the second entrance, the acquisition means triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Dynamic display for dynamically displaying a lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the acquired first information and the second information, and identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means Means, storage means capable of storing each of the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result Based on the display of the identification information, special awards that are advantageous to the player A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening and passing through the first entrance and the second entrance And a distribution means that can alternately distribute the game balls that have passed through the passage opening, and the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are transferred to the first entrance opening and the first entry by the distribution means. A determination means for determining which of the two entrances is assigned, a first notification means for informing a first notification mode based on a determination result by the determination means, the first entrance or the second entrance And a second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on the game ball entering the ball opening.

  As a result, in the first notification mode notified by passing through the passage port and the variable second notification mode, the game enters the first entrance port or the second entrance port. You can make the player think as if he entered the ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference between the timing when the player enters the passage and the timing when the player enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the first aspect, when the first notification means notifies the first notification mode, the first notification mode has elapsed for a predetermined time or more. However, when the second notification means does not change to the second notification mode, the first notification mode is set to the non-notification mode, so that the game ball that has passed through the passage port is in the first or second input mode. There is an effect that the player can recognize that he has not entered the ball opening.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a distribution unit. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a judgment value per second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of these. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol 1. FIG. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol 2. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of big hit. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of a fluctuation | variation classification. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the display of a holding | maintenance symbol and an effect symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of normal time, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of entering a distribution unit. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation at the time of the entrance to a entrance, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation at the time of a ball entering judgment period. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the variable execution determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the advance winning detection process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the advance prize production process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect in case a ball entering judgment period passes at the time of a fluctuation | variation (it can replace). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the production | presentation when a ball entering judgment period passes at the time of a fluctuation | variation period (it cannot replace). (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of entering a distribution unit, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of a ball entering judgment period, (c) is It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation after a ball entering judgment period progress. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous variation process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation start process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous change stop process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the distribution unit 640. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  The inner frame 12 has a gaming board 13 having a number of nails, a winning opening 63, a sorting unit 640 having a right and right second entrance 64b2, a first entrance 64a and a second entrance 64b (see FIG. 2) is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize) to be described later are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64a, the sorting unit 640, the right second entrance 64b2, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning entrance 63, the first entrance 64a, the second entrance 64b, 64b2, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 in the distribution unit 640 are formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and the balls go to the second entrance 64b, 64b2. When entering a ball, the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a hit, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is opened, and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As will be described in detail later, the special symbol jackpot is determined by a dedicated lottery for each of the first special symbol jackpot and the second special symbol jackpot. If the first special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of jackpot A and jackpot B. If the second special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C (FIGS. 10A to 10B). reference). The specific winning opening 65a is opened as many times as the number of jackpot types. Further, after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the right second entrance 64b2 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the right second entrance 64b2. It becomes easy to do. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b2, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are three types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, and “Big Jack C”.

  When it becomes “big hit A”, “big hit B”, and “big hit C”, it becomes a special game state with the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot type. As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, specifically, the “big hit A” is a big hit (15R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open port) 65a is opened 15 times. Later in the short-time gaming state (period in which the special symbol has a low probability, the normal symbol probability is set to a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory becomes long, and the number of times of opening is set large), the special symbol starts to change 100 times It is set 100 times as a period until it is done. “Big Bonus B” is a jackpot (15R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is opened 15 times, and after the jackpot game, a probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability of a special symbol is set to a high probability ( High probability game state) is given 100 times (the number of times of special symbol fluctuation). Further, the “big hit C” is a big hit (2R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened twice, and 100 chance games are given after the big hit game. In addition, “probable jackpot A” and “big jackpot B” are also given a short-time game state of a normal symbol during probability variation games. Also, “big hit A” and “big hit B” are until the opening time of one round of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. The “big hit C” is set until the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is 1 second or ten game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the present embodiment, a small hit different from the big win is set with a predetermined probability in the case of a loss. When winning a small win, the specific winning opening 65a is opened twice. The opening time of the specific winning opening 65a for one round of the specific winning opening 65a is set until 1 game ball or 10 gaming balls enter in the same manner as the “big hit C”. As described above, it is difficult for the player to identify “big hit C” and “small win” from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, since “big hit C” and “small hit” are notified in the state (main chance) that the main symbol of “341” is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display the special symbol (third It is difficult to identify from the design. Further, the special symbol (first symbol) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is an LED or 7-segment display that is difficult for the player to identify, and is configured so that the jackpot type is difficult to distinguish. Yes.

  In addition, since a short-time game is not set after “big hit C” and “small hit”, it is difficult to identify whether it was “big hit C” or “small hit” in subsequent games. Thereby, even if the player is “small hit”, the game can be performed with the expectation that the “big hit C” is executed and the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state. . Thereby, the malfunction which a player gets tired of a game in the period until "big hit AC" is performed can be suppressed.

  Here, the “special symbol probability change gaming state (high probability state)” means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability has increased, so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol probability change), in other words, special symbol It is a game state that is easily shifted to the game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is referred to as a “normal game state of a special symbol (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. The jackpot probability indicates a normal state (a normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, and the Riu electric character is a game ball provided along with the second entrance 64b. Is a game state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the short time period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds at the jackpot according to the jackpot type Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery ends three times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed six times after the end, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the" big hit C "ends. The short state may be continued at this time.

  Furthermore, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the second entrance 64b or the electric symbol is released at one normal symbol hit. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become. Instead of the special symbol lottery count, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Here, the configuration of the sorting unit 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 640. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front surface side, and the cover body is made of a member that can be seen through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  In the upper part of the sorting unit 640, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type ball entrance sensor 640a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage opening is disposed. . The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entry opening 64a and the second entry opening 64b that are disposed below.

  The sorting member 900 receives the entered game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 640a, the sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball as viewed from the front (see FIG. 34A), and the game ball is moved to the first entrance port. Guide to 64a. Here, each of the sorting members 900 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees in the left and right directions, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 640, the magnet 901b of the sorting member 900 is disposed at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 is located at a position where the sorting member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b is located directly above (on the center line of a space where a game ball at the passage opening can be inserted by about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), there is no stopping at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly upwards. It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the sorting member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, so that the sorting member 900 is either left or right. It rotates and either of the accommodating part 900a or the accommodating part 900b turns to the side (game machine upper side) which receives the game ball which enters the distribution unit 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900b and causing a ball clogging.

  Further, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, after the housing portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, the storage portion 900b is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is received by the storage portion 900b. The sorting member 900 rotates about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second entrance 64b. As described above, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting unit 640 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls equally to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b, and to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as the first entrance 64a, which will be described later). The first lottery game) and the lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second entrance 64b can be efficiently executed.

  The right second entrance 64b2 is an entrance where the lottery of the second special symbol will be started when a game ball enters in the same manner as the second entrance 64b. In the second special symbol, the number of the holding balls is four, including the second entrance 64b and the right second entrance 64b2.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed through the left side can enter the passage port of the sorting unit 640 (size that allows one game ball to pass). The right second entrance 64b2 is configured such that only game balls that have passed the right side can enter.

  Here, FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped in a state where the sorting member 900 is rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the game ball is housed in the housing portion 900a, and the first entry port is guided while being guided to the guiding portion z1 by rotating the sorting member 900 counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball. A game ball is guided to 64a.

  After the game balls are distributed to the first entrance by the distribution member 900, as shown in FIG. 3B, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the housing portion 900c faces upward. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is housed in the housing portion 900c, and the game ball is distributed to the second entrance 64b. Therefore, it can distribute alternately to the 1st entrance 64a and the 2nd entrance 64b.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is newly made by the time the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot ends, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed after the jackpot of the new special symbol is over. The lottery is continued until 100 lotteries are completed. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 12 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, until at least 102 lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lottery performed after the new jackpot are finished, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol time-short state”, the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “normal symbol short-time state” is further increased to the new jackpot. After the end, it continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 64b, 64b2 (start winning prize) is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of variation, the special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the first entrance 64 or the second entrance The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the mouths 64b and 64b2, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81, and even when entering the second entrance 64b, 64b2, the number of entered balls is maximum. The ball is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b, 64b2 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of times of holding is 4 times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the big hit type. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds of jackpots in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is jackpot A or jackpot B, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the jackpot type. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds of jackpots in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. In the case of a big hit C, a chance eye composed of “341” breaks is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance chance is one type of “341”, but is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other random eyes, or one of the reach misses may be set as the chance eye. Good.

  Variation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol is set in the order of winning based on the priority set in the gaming state. The

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set so that only the 15th round jackpot is selected, and the second special symbol is selected. Then, it is set so that the jackpot of two rounds is selected with a probability of 40%. As a ratio of jackpots to shift to the high probability gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 80% respectively, and are configured at the same rate.

  Therefore, the first special symbol is set so that the jackpot advantageous to the player is more easily selected than the second special symbol. Here, since the distribution unit 640 wins alternately at the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed alternately. Is done.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a bias from being biased to one prize opening, and to prevent the player's damage from becoming excessive. It is configured so as to be able to suppress inconvenience that the performance becomes extremely high. In addition, since the frequency of the so-called over-winning, which exceeds the upper limit of the number of reserved balls due to being biased to one of the winning holes, can be reduced, even though a ball has entered the winning hole. The player's dissatisfaction due to not winning a prize can be reduced, and the game player's sales will not increase due to the turnover rate of the game being worsened by stopping the ball injection every time the player reaches the upper limit of the number of balls held. Can be prevented.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, the lower side is the main display area Dm that displays the 3rd symbol variably, and the other upper side is the holding ball. This is a sub display area Ds for displaying numbers and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are reserved balls that are the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. This is the area for displaying numbers. Specifically, in the small region Ds1, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and an effect symbol based on the ball entering the sorting unit 640 are displayed, and in the small region Ds2, the special symbol 2 is reserved. A reserved symbol indicating the number of balls and an effect symbol based on a ball entering the sorting unit 640 are displayed.

  Although details will be described later, when a ball enters the sorting unit 640, the incoming sensor is detected by the incoming sensor 640a, and an effect symbol is displayed on Ds1 or Ds2 according to the inclination of the sorting member 900 in the sorting unit 640. Is displayed. Thereafter, when a winning is made at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are “white circle symbols (see FIG. 5A)” so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be identified. The reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed as “white triangle symbol (see FIG. 5A)”, and the effect symbol is displayed as “white square symbol (see FIG. 5A)”. The symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integral symbol in the display area of the number of reserved balls, and based on the entry into the sorting unit 640, the integrated symbol is displayed. Since the effect design which is a part is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the reserved design is being displayed based on having entered the sorting unit 640.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and sometimes a notice effect is performed, for example, when a character appears. . In addition, it may be suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the reserved ball of the second entrance 64b is set in the same manner as the first entrance 64a.

  In this embodiment, the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 64b2 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls held is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, each of which includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each area, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is synchronized with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 64b2. Each value is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 64b2. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first per random number table 202a includes a first per random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability and a first per random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, The number of random numbers that are jackpots in the table is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the first per-random number table 202a1 (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability and the first per-random number table 202a2 (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability are stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 64b2.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol 1 If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 8B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 29” is the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b) for high probability. ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIGS. 9A to 9B). As shown in FIG. 9A, when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2. Becomes “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type of is “Big Jack A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 59” is “jackpot B”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot C”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 64b2.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110 (see FIG. 9A).

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D) includes, for example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disengagement (for a short time)”, “discovery normal reach” as variation patterns for removal. ”,“ Outgoing Super Reach ”,“ Outgoing Special Reach ”are stipulated, and the variation patterns for jackpots are“ Normal Normal Reach ”,“ Per Super Reach ”, and“ Perch Special Reach ”. Yes. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  There are 24 random numbers that are hit by a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e, normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, probability changing counter 203g, hour and minute counter 203h, counter buffer 203i, fluctuation execution flag 203j, and fluctuation order storage area 203k Other memory areas 203z are also provided.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (first special symbol), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64a, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when lottery of special symbol 1 is performed in main controller 110, each value of each counter C1-C3 stored in the reserved first area of special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sent to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first entrance 64a (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting win, winning information including those values is obtained. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the first entrance port 64a ( The only difference is that the first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the order of winning. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, other Shift processing is performed in which the winning data stored in the reserved area is packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time the ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value is 8. 1 is added (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display held in the special symbol 2) is held. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the ball number command (see S208 and S213 in FIG. 17 and S605 and S612 in FIG. 21). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs main control by a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls of the variable display held in the device 110 itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol normal display (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S805 in FIG. 23).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S706 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S803 in FIG. 23: No).

  The probability changing counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable change state, and if the value of the counter 203g during probability change is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability changing counter 203g has an initial value set to zero, and the main controller 110 sets the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the closing timing (that is, the jackpot end timing) in the final round of jackpot. A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 0 is set for “big hit type A”, and 100 is set for “big hit type B” and “big hit type C”. Thereafter, while the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S216 in FIG. 22).

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 18) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 19) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start processing or the special symbol 2 variation start processing, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the special symbol 1 variation start processing is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a2 for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to zero. In the main controller 110, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed at the main round final round (that is, the jackpot end timing). A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” and “big hit type B”, and 0 is set for “big hit type C”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is completed until the value of the hour / minute counter 203h becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203h is 0, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 22).

  The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. This flag is an area that is backed up even when power is interrupted, and the first special symbol is preferentially set in the initial state where the RAM is cleared.

  The change order storage area 203k is an area for storing a winning order for each piece of reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this change order storage area 203k, eight storage areas are set, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 9A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. Yes.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. In the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, a small hit determination value is set to “30 to 39”. On the other hand, no small hit determination value is set in the first hit random number table 202a for low probability.

  As a result, in the normal gaming state in which the first special symbol is preferentially changed, it is possible to prevent the small win from being established, and it becomes easy to identify that the winning two rounds are the small hit. Can be suppressed. Also, in the short time in the probabilistic gaming state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed, it is easy to win a big hit C. Therefore, by setting to win a small hit, it is a big hit C or small It can be difficult to identify whether or not it is a win, and the player can play for a longer time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9C) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type. . As shown in FIG. 9 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 dedicated to the first special symbol (see FIG. 10A) and a special symbol 2 dedicated to the second special symbol. And a selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 10B).

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected, and the value “1” of the first hit type counter C2 is determined as the big hit A determination value. “0-19” is set as “20-99” as the judgment value of jackpot B. Also, as shown in FIG. 10B, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is set so that the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be selected, respectively. The counter C2 value “0-19” is set as a jackpot B determination value “20-59” and a jackpot C determination value “60-99”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9A) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the normal symbol has a low probability (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9D) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11 (b)) when the success / failure determination result is a jackpot, and the success / failure determination. If the result is out of play and the game state is normal, a dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11 (c)) and the result of the determination is out of control and the game state is probable game state. Each of them is configured at least by a use (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D). In addition, although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table for a short-time gaming state is set.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a variation start flag 223d. A stop type selection flag 223e, a preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, a preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g, a special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h, and a special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i. Is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, each of the counters C1 to C3 which are winning information is provided. Each value is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64a, or variation display in a special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1610 in FIG. 31). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 held ball number counter. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a reserved ball number counter dedicated to the second entrance 64b, 64b2 (second special symbol), and is different from the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Since only the first entrance 64a (first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b, 64b2 (second special symbol), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 39). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the passage port when the sorting member 900 is oriented in the direction of distributing the game ball to the first entrance port 64a.

  The preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g passes through the passage opening when the sorting member 900 is directed in the direction of distributing the game balls to the second entrance with respect to the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223f. Then, it is different in that 1 is added.

  The special figure 1 pre-winning flag 223h is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage when the sorting member 900 faces in the direction to be sorted to the first entrance 64a. This flag makes it possible to determine whether a game ball has entered the first entrance 64a after the game ball has passed through the passage. In the present embodiment, if the player does not enter the first entrance 64a even after 3 seconds have passed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on, the player does not enter the first entrance 64a. It can be determined that the paper is discharged out of the sorting unit 640.

  The special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage when the sorting member 900 faces in the direction to be sorted to the second entrance 64b. This flag makes it possible to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the second entrance 64b after the game ball has passed through the passage. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the second entrance 64b even after 3 seconds have passed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on, the player does not enter the second entrance 64b. It can be determined that the paper is discharged out of the sorting unit 640.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Since details of the display control device 114 are known, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15, the display mode of the reserved symbols in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 shows the display timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before passing through the passage opening (entrance sensor 640a) of the sorting unit 640 and entering the first entrance 64a. It is a timing chart.

  FIG. 13A is a timing chart in the case where a game ball passes through the passage opening and then enters the first entry opening 64a before the entry determination period (3 seconds) elapses. In the small area Ds1, two effect symbols “white square symbols” indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage are displayed, and two “white circle symbols” that are reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed. (See FIG. 14). Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the passage opening, the sorting member 900 is in a state where it can be distributed to the first entry opening 64a in a state where the housing portion 900a faces upward. In the empty area of the small area Ds1, “white square symbol” is displayed at the position with the youngest winning order (see FIG. 14B). Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64a within 3 seconds, a “white circle symbol” which is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed inside the “white square symbol” (FIG. 15 (a )reference). When the white circle symbol is displayed, the effect symbol is continuously displayed until the reserved symbol is not displayed.

  As a result, the player recognizes that the fused symbol with the white circle symbol displayed inside the square symbol is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol. Therefore, it can be recognized as the effect that the reserved symbol is displayed until the white circle symbol is displayed after the effect symbol is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the hold of the first special symbol is displayed at the timing when the effect symbol is displayed, and can reduce the sense of incongruity due to the time difference until actually entering the first entrance 64a.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display timing of the display mode when the ball enters the passage and does not enter the first entrance 64a even after the entrance judgment period has elapsed. When the sorting member 900 is directed to the first entrance at the timing of entering the passage, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), an effect design is added to the small area Ds1 and displayed. To do. After that, if the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a even after the entrance judgment period (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Set.

  In this way, by making the effect symbol non-displayed at the timing when the entrance determination period has elapsed, it is possible to notify the player that the entrance has not entered the first entrance 64a. Therefore, the player can play the game while recognizing the exact number of the reserved balls.

  When the game ball passes through the passing port with the sorting member 900 facing the position where the game ball is distributed to the second entrance 640b, the effect symbol “white square symbol” is displayed in the small area Ds2. The In the second special symbol, a white triangle symbol is displayed inside the white square symbol of the effect symbol.

  Note that the position of the sorting member 900 is configured to be identifiable by the rotation sensor 990. In the present embodiment, the position of the sorting member 900 is determined by the rotation sensor 990. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the sorting member 900 may be determined each time by the entered entrance. . Specifically, based on having entered the first entrance 64a, the sorting member 900 is configured to determine that the storage portion 900c is facing upward. With this configuration, the position of the sorting member 900 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 900 is rotated by vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 900 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position every time the ball enters the entrance.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 27. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through-gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of times of holding N2) is acquired (S203). Next, a change execution determination process is performed in which it is determined whether the change sphere is executed with the reserved sphere of the special symbol 1 or the hold sphere of the special symbol 2 and the change execution flag 203j is set (S204). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process is the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205). If it is not the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205: No) ), It is determined whether or not the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in FIG. 2 (S210). If the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution (2) in FIG. 2 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206) and is changed by the calculation. The reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S207). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S205, if the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in FIG. S210) If the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same process as the process for the special sphere 1 reserved sphere described above is performed for the special sphere 2 reserved sphere. Do.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. 2 Fluctuation start processing is executed (S214). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 19 or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, the stop symbol of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is set. More specifically, when the special symbol 1 is a big hit, whether the big hit A, the big hit B or the big hit C is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, the special hit 1 is determined. If the symbol 2 is a big hit, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, the special symbol display (the result of the current lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S219), and the process proceeds to S224.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0 (S220). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222: Yes), the hour / hour counter 203h is determined. 1 is subtracted (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S224.

  In the process of S224 executed after the process of S219, S222, or S223, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the variable stop (S224).

  Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). The first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is used. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the variation execution flag 203j (S301), and data in the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Thereafter, the data in the change order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → holding third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted such as the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (1) (S304).

  If it is determined in the process of S304 that the execution area data is special figure 1 (1) (S304: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution (1) in special figure 1 (S305). This process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution area data is not the special figure 1 (1) (S304: No), it is determined whether the execution area data is the special figure 2 (2) (S306). When it is determined in the process of S306 that the execution area data is special figure 2 (2) (S306: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (S307), and this process To return to the special symbol variation process.

  If it is determined in the process of S306 that the execution area data is not the special figure 2 (2) (S306: No), there is no holding ball to be changed and the variable execution flag 203j remains in the initial state. To return to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 change start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter of the special symbol 1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each value of C3 is acquired (S401), and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S402). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability changing is being performed, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability changing is not being performed. If it is determined in S402 that the probability change is in progress (S402: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (S403). ), The process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 9B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S403). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 399”, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 9B). ).

  On the other hand, when the probability changing counter 203g is 0 and it is determined that the probability is not changing (S402: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a. (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 9B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S404). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 39”, it is determined to be a small hit, and “40 to 399”. If it is within the range, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. In the process of S406, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit. When it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the special table 1 selection table 202b1 The display mode is further set (S407), and the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S408).

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b, and 3 Of the special jackpots of special symbols (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is determined that the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “20 to 59”, the jackpot It is determined that it is B (15R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “60 to 99”, it is determined that it is jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot) (see FIG. 10A).

  In the process of S407, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S408). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S408, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D). Specifically, if it is a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and super reach (60 seconds) if it is in the range of “51 to 179”. If it is in the range of “180 to 198”, it becomes a fluctuation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 11B).

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S406: No), a display mode of out is set (S409). In the process of S409, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the above. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out”, and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S407, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D). Specifically, if it is completely out of the range when it is not in the midst of a certain change, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, it is short out (7 seconds), and if it is in the range of “99 to 198”. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of “150 to 197”, it is super reach (60). If it is “198”, it will be a special reach (90 seconds).

  When the process of S407 or the process of S410 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined by the process of S407 or the process of S410 is set (S411). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S407 or S410 is set (S412). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (FIG. 26). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S412 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 variation start process, similarly to the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the first per random number counter C1 of the special symbol 2 acquired by the processing of S501 and the first per random number table 202a. A lottery result is acquired based on the determination value of the random number table 202a. If it is determined in the process of S502 that the probability is changing (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a ( S503) When it is determined that there is no probability change (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504). Thereafter, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S505), and it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S506).

  If it is determined in S506 that the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S506: Yes), the jackpot display mode is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501. (S507).

  The specific content is the first symbol display corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) in the same manner as the setting of the display mode at the jackpot time (S407) of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). The display mode of the device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set, and the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) is set as the stop type. In this embodiment, the setting in S507 is performed using a special figure 2 selection table 202b2, which is different from the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 used in the special symbol 1 jackpot display mode setting (S407). However, it may be set using the same table.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202d2 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S508), and the process proceeds to S511.

  On the other hand, in the process of S506, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out (S506: No), a display mode of out is set (S509). The specific content is the same as the setting (S409) of the display mode out of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209).

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d (S510), and the process proceeds to S511.

  When the processing of S508 or the processing of S510 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S508 or S510 is set (S511). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S507 or S509 is set (S512). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (FIG. 26). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S512 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S601). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Then, whether there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S603: No), the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is acquired (S606), and the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k is acquired. Special figure 1 (1) is set (S607), and the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the fluctuation order storage area 203k in the above-described fluctuation execution determination process (S204), the start opening fluctuates the special symbol 1 as in this embodiment, and the special symbol 2 Even when there are two types of fluctuations, the fluctuations can be started in the order of winning in the start opening.

  In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 64b (S608). When it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64b (S608: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is processed in the same manner as when the first entrance 64 is won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S609), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S610: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S611), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S612). Then, the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S613), special figure 2 (2) is set in the first area of the change order storage area 203k (S614), and this process is terminated. Note that the determination of the first area in S614 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S609.

  There is no winning at the second entrance 64b (S608: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S610: No), this processing is performed as it is.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S708). The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / hour state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S708, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S712: Yes). The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714: Yes) It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value (M) of 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Also, the number-of-holding balls command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) or the start winning process (see FIG. 21), the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 19), or the special symbol 2 variation process (see FIG. 20). ) Is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) and the sound lamp control device 113 are transmitted. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. This jackpot end setting includes the setting of the start of the special variable period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in rounds other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 20) ends, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) or the process of S721, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22), the second symbol display device 83 executes it. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S1001) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being jackpoted (S1201). Specifically, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) S219 is executed, and if the special symbol jackpot start is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1201, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning award (large opening) 65a of this time is the last round (that is, whether or not all of the jackpot rounds have ended) (S1207).

  When it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and values corresponding to the jackpot are set in various counters. It sets (S1209). That is, by setting 100 in the hour / short counter 203h, the normal symbol is set in a high probability state (short time state) from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. After setting various counter values, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1207: No), S1208 and S1209 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 34, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S1418 (see FIG. 29) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 29), it executes a power-off process in S1418. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1418 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1418, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1418, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1418 is executed (see S1417 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1418 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1308. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1311), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1308 is performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing S1402 to S1411. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1402 to S1411 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1412, the pseudo continuous fluctuation process of S1413, and the fluctuation display setting process of S1414 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, it is possible to detect the entrance by the entrance sensor 640a. Based on the command received by the command determination process, the setting related to the variable effect can be performed without delay by performing the setting related to the advance winning effect based on the command without delay. .

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1402). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later are set (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamps (Ds1, Ds2) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1412. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1412, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1412). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, in the advance winning detection process (S1411), an advance winning effect process for performing an effect based on the detected entry by the entered sensor 640a is executed (S1413). Details of the preceding prize effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1414). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1417), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the advance winning detection process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the advance winning detection process (S1411). This pre-winning detection process (S1411) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, there is a detection of the entrance by the entrance sensor 640a. In the case of winning, a winning effect according to the first winning slot 64a or the second winning slot 64b which is a predicted winning destination is executed.

  In the preceding winning detection process (S1411), first, it is determined by the incoming sensor 640a whether or not the ball has entered the entrance (S1501). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the entrance (S1502), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the entrance, it is predicted which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b the game ball will enter. As a method for predicting the winning prize destination, prediction is performed by calculating the orientation of the sorting member 900 from the tilt by a sensor (not shown) that detects the tilt mounted on the shaft of the sorting member 900. In addition, the detection of the direction of the sorting member 900 for predicting the winning prize may not be performed by a sensor that detects the inclination, and for example, a magnet and a Hall sensor may be used. In addition, as described above, since the direction of the sorting member 900 is alternated between the left and right in the prediction of the winning prize, the winning prize may be predicted based on the number of winning prizes, and in that case, no sensor is required. Can do.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the first entrance by the processing of S1502 (S1503), and when it is predicted that the ball will not win the first entrance (S1503: No). , The process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will win the first entrance (S1503: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 holding number counter is acquired (S1504). It is determined whether the value (SN1) of the acquired preceding special figure 1 hold number counter is less than a predetermined number (less than 4 in this embodiment) (S1505). If it is not less than the predetermined number (S1505: No), S1506 Step S1508 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 hold number counter is less than the predetermined number (S1505: Yes), 1 is added to the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 hold number counter (S1506). Thereafter, the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (S1507), the display special figure 1 advance prize effect command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  A winning sound is output in the sound editing / output process (S1409) of the main process (FIG. 29) in the sound lamp control device, based on the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h turned on in the process of S1507. As a result, a winning sound can be output at the timing when the ball enters the 640 that can be visually recognized by the player, so that either the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b in which the player cannot visually recognize the prize is displayed. It is possible to reduce the player's uncomfortable feeling compared to the conventional case where the winning sound is output at the timing of winning the crab. In addition, a ball enters 640 in which the player can visually recognize the effect as if the reserved symbol is lit (see FIG. 14 (b)) by the display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command set by the processing of S1508. Since it can be executed at the timing of the ball, compared to the conventional in which the holding symbol is lit at the timing of winning in either the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b where the player can not see the winning, A player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound output here is continuously output until it enters the first entrance 64a. If the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a, the game is stopped based on the flag being turned off after 3 seconds of the entrance determination period.

  When the processing of S1503, S1505 or S1508 is finished, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the second entrance by the processing of S1502 (S1509), and it is predicted that the ball will not win the second entrance. If (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will win the second entrance (S1509: Yes), the same processing as in the case where it is predicted to win the first entrance (S1503 to S1508) is executed. Specifically, the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is acquired (S1510), and the acquired value of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter (SN2) is less than a predetermined number (less than 4 in this embodiment). ) (S1511), and if it is not less than the predetermined number (S1511: No), the processing of S1512 to S1514 is skipped, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is less than the predetermined number (S1511: Yes), the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is incremented by 1 (S1512). The advance winning flag 223i is turned on (S1513), a display special figure 2 preceding winning effect command is set (S1514), and this process is terminated.

  Next, a command determination process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1412). This command determination processing (S1412) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1412), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main controller 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1602), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1603), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. If a variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). If a reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), a held ball number command receiving process is executed (S1608), and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1608) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1608). In the reserved ball number command reception process (S1608), first, it is determined whether or not the received reserved ball number command is the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 (S1701). When it is determined that the received held ball number command is the special symbol 1 (S1701: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 held ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1702). Thereafter, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b is set (S1703).

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1702. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203d. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, Or the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1703 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired (S1704), and the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is obtained (SN1). It is determined whether or not there are more (S1705). When it is determined that the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is larger than the acquired value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball counter (S1705: Yes), The value (SN1) is changed to the variable display hold count N1 in the special symbol 1 (S1706), and the process proceeds to S1707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is not larger than the value of the acquired preceding special figure 1 hold ball counter (SN1), the process of S1706 is skipped and the process of S1707 is performed. Migrate to

  In the processing of S1707, the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is acquired within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds in the present embodiment) after the special symbol 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on (1). It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is the same value (S1707). If the determination in S1707 is true, the special figure 1 advance winning flag is set to off (0) (S1708), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in S1707 is false, the process in S1708 is skipped and the process is terminated. Here, the special figure 1 pre-winning flag 223h is set to on (1) based on the detection of the winning by the pitch sensor 640a in the pre-winning detection process (S1411) of the main process (FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device. The preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is incremented by one. Since the main control device adds 1 to the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 by the winning at the first entrance after the ball is detected, and transmits it as a hold ball number command, the change in the special symbol 1 The number N1 of the display suspension is equal to the value (SN1) of the acquired preceding special figure 1 retention ball number counter. Therefore, by receiving the reserved ball number command during a predetermined period after the special figure 1 pre-winning flag is turned on (1), the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 and the acquired prior special figure 1 are obtained. If the value of the held ball counter (SN1) matches, the special figure 1 advance winning flag is turned off (0) on the assumption that there has been a winning at the first entrance 64 after detecting the entering by the entering sensor 640a. Set. If this special figure 1 advance winning flag is not set to off (0) within a predetermined period after the detection of the entry, it is determined that no entry has been made to the first entrance 64 after the entry by the entry sensor 640a. Can do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received reserved ball number command is not the special symbol 1 (S1701: No), the same processing as the processing of S1702 to S1708 is executed for the special symbol 2 (S1709 to S1715). Details of the processing are the same as those described in S1702 to S1708 described above, and are therefore omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. In the process of S1607, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1609). When the winning information command is received (S1609: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1610). Return to processing. In the process of S1610, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  If the winning information command is not received in the processing of S1609 (S1609: No), it is next determined whether or not a round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1611). When the round number command is received (S1611: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1612), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1613), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command is not received in the processing of S1611 (S1611: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed ( S1614), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted. Specific examples of other commands include the opening start command described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the advance winning effect process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the preceding winning effect process (S1413). This variation display setting process (S1413) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the first input is detected by the incoming sensor 640a. If no winning is made at the 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance, the display special figure 1 advance prize production command or the display special figure 2 advance prize production command is generated in order to change the display of the pseudo hold symbol. And set.

  In the advance prize production process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (1) (S1801). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on (1) (S1801: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S1802). The special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned off (0). After that, the display special figure 1 advance winning effect command is set (S1804), and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (1) (S1801: No), the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is turned on (1). It is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (S1805). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on (1) (S1805: Yes), the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S1806). The special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned off (0). Thereafter, the display special figure 2 advance winning effect command is set (S1808), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on (1) (S1805: No), the process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the variable display setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1414). This variable display setting process (S1414) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1907. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1902), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After the data is shifted, 1 is subtracted from the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f or the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g (S1906), and the process proceeds to S1907.

  In the processing of S1907, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1907). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1907: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1907: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1908), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1909).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911.

  In the process of S1910, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1911). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is possible to identify that the passing game ball is distributed (in the first entrance slot 64a, a sound effect of “Pew”, At the second entrance 64b, a sound effect “boone” is output. Thereby, it is possible to determine which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b is entered at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage.

  Furthermore, even when the game ball passes through the passage opening as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage opening and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance opening, even if the production symbol is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the time difference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is determined to which entry the game ball is distributed, and the effect design is displayed at the corresponding position, and then the effect design is displayed. Since the holding symbol is displayed and varied, the player can feel as if the holding ball is increasing at the timing when it passes through the passage opening. Therefore, a player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same for the hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a merged manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbol and the reserved symbol may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to a production pattern in which a drop falls at the timing when it passes through the passage opening, and then an image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the entry determination period, and the first entry opening 64a or At the timing of entering the second entrance 64b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from within the drop and the drop may be hidden. If the ball is not entered into the entrance, the character is not displayed and the drop display mode is not displayed. Thereby, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation of whether the fairy is displayed.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the effect symbol is displayed based on the detection of the entrance to the sorting unit 640 by the entrance sensor 640a. The effect symbol is configured to be an integrated symbol with the reserved symbol displayed based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. Thereby, the player can be given an impression as if the reserved symbol is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting unit 640. If there is no entry to the first entry slot 64a or the second entry slot 64b within a predetermined period after the entry is detected (if the entry is made to the sorting unit but no entry is made), The displayed design symbol is hidden.

On the other hand, in 2nd Embodiment, based on the entrance detection to the distribution unit 640 by the entrance sensor 640a, the small area | region which respond | corresponds the pseudo on hold design which is a design for suggesting the number of on hold balls artificially Displayed on Ds1 and Ds2. The reserved symbol displayed based on the entry to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is displayed in the small area Ds3, which is the lower left area of the main display area Dm, and the player determines the number of holds. Identification information that is difficult to recognize is displayed (see FIGS. 37A to 37C). (In this embodiment, “A” is displayed when the number of reserved balls is one, “B” when the number is two, “C” when three, and “D” when four. To do.)
If there is no entry to the first entry slot 64a or the second entry slot 64b within a predetermined period after the entry is detected, the pseudo-holding symbol once displayed is pseudo-displayed. By executing the variable display, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player when the pseudo-pending symbols are not displayed.

  This is because, for a player who has the impression that it is a reserved symbol with respect to the pseudo reserved symbol that is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting unit 640, the pseudo reserved symbol is not displayed (that is, This is because it is unnatural if the variable display is not executed when one of the holding balls is digested).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the configuration is included in the main process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The partial processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, processing executed by the main control device 110, and other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the display and variation display of the reserved symbol and the pseudo reserved symbol in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a period during which the variable display can be pseudo-stopped and restarted during the variable period (a replaceable period) is determined in advance for each variable pattern.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a case where it is determined that there is no entry to the first entry port 64a or the second entry port 64b within a predetermined period after entry detection in the changeable period during the fluctuation period. It is. Specifically, when there are two pseudo-reserved symbols and two reserved symbols for the special symbol 1 and there is a ball entering the sorting unit 640a, and the ball entering sensor 640a detects the ball entering, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The pseudo-pending symbols to be changed to three (see FIG. 37 (a)). After that, when it is determined that there is no winning of the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within the period of the entrance determination period a in the replaceable period, a pseudo stop display is displayed and the next A pseudo continuous fluctuation notice (pseudo continuous notice) suggesting that the change display executed and the continuous performance are performed is displayed (see FIG. 37B). Thereafter, the display of the pseudo-pending symbols is changed to two states, and pseudo-variable display is started (FIG. 37 (c)). When the pseudo variation display stops, the pseudo hold symbol and the display of the hold symbol are changed to one state, and the variation display based on the winning information of the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is started.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 36 shows that the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is entered within a predetermined period after entry detection in a period that is not the above-described exchangeable period (non-replacement period) during the fluctuation period. It is the figure which showed the case where it is judged that there is no entrance. In this case, before the next variable display to be executed, the pseudo variable display is executed, so that the variable display based on the pseudo hold symbol is displayed in a pseudo manner.

  Specifically, when there are two pseudo-reserved symbols and two reserved symbols for the special symbol 1 and there is a ball entering the sorting unit 640a, and the ball entering sensor 640a detects the ball entering, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The pseudo-pending symbols to be changed to three (see FIG. 37 (a)). After that, when it is determined that there is no winning of the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within the period of the entrance determination period a in the non-replaceable period of the change period, the change display being executed is continued as it is. Is done. After the change display is stopped, the display of the pseudo hold symbol is changed to two states, and the pseudo change display is started. When the pseudo variation display is stopped, one pseudo hold symbol and one hold symbol are subtracted and the display is changed to one state, and the variation display based on the winning information of the special symbol 1 is displayed. Be started. Here, when the pseudo fluctuation display is stopped, a pseudo continuous fluctuation notice (pseudo continuous notice) is displayed, which suggests that the next fluctuation display to be executed and the continuous production are performed. May be.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that both the pseudo hold symbol and the hold symbol which entered the passage could be displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. By displaying the pseudo-pending symbol as a symbol that is easily understandable to the player and displaying the pending symbol as a symbol that is difficult for the player to identify, the player can recognize the pseudo-pending symbol as if it were a reserved symbol. Therefore, since the pseudo on-hold symbol is added and displayed at the timing when it passes through the passage opening, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference until the ball enters the entrance.

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the passage opening does not enter the first entry opening 64a or the second entry opening 64b, the first entry opening without passing through the passage opening. When the ball enters the 64a or the second entrance 64b, a difference from the reserved symbol occurs.

  However, if the game ball that has passed through the passage opening does not enter the first entry slot 64a or the second entry slot 64b, the number of pseudo-holding symbols will be larger than the actual holding symbol, By executing the variation with the special symbol, the pseudo reserved symbol is digested one more than the reserved symbol. Thereby, a difference can be eliminated. In addition, when entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b without passing through the passage, the difference can be eliminated by lighting the pseudo-holding symbol in accordance with the holding symbol.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. First, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  Of these main processes, the processes of S1401 to S1412 and S1414 to S1419 execute the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1412 and S1414 to S1419 in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is done. Then, in the main process in the second embodiment, a pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) is executed instead of the preceding winning effect process (S1413) in the first embodiment.

  Next, the pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this pseudo continuous variation process (S1420). The pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) is performed when the entrance sensor 640a detects the entrance but does not enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 65b. This is a process for executing a pseudo continuous variation effect that performs a variation effect by consuming the pseudo hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the ball entry detection by 640a.

  In the quasi-continuous variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag or the special figure 2 advance prize flag is turned on (1) (S2301). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance winning flag or the special figure 2 advance winning flag is turned on (1) (S2301: Yes), the incoming detection by the incoming sensor 640a is detected. In spite of this, since it is a case where it did not enter the 1st entrance 64a or the 2nd entrance 65b, a pseudo continuous variation start process is performed (S2302), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the pseudo continuous variation start process (S2302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous variation start process (S2302). This pseudo continuous variation start process (S2302) is performed when the entrance sensor 640a detects the entrance but does not enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 65b. This is a process for starting a pseudo continuous variation effect in which a pseudo effect is performed by consuming the pseudo-pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the detection of the entrance by the entrance sensor 640a.

  In the quasi-continuous variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is on (1) (S2401). If it is determined that the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is not on (1) (S2401: No), the process proceeds to S2409. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is on (1) (S2401: Yes), the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is set to off (0) (S2402). Thereafter, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are acquired (S2404), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger (S2404). When it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is not larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2404: No), the process proceeds to S2409.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2404: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball The value (SN1) of the number counter 223f is changed to become the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2405), and it is determined whether or not it is a stop symbol replacement period (S2406).

  If it is determined that it is the stop symbol replacement period (S2406: Yes), a display pseudo-stop type command, a display pseudo-variation pattern command, and a display special figure 1 advance prize effect command are sequentially set (S2407). ). The variable display is pseudo-stopped by the display pseudo-stop type command set here (see FIG. 37 (b)), and the pseudo continuous variation effect is started by the display pseudo-variation pattern command (FIG. 37 ( c)), and the display of the pseudo-holding symbol is updated by the display special figure 1 advance winning effect command (see FIG. 37C). As a result, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter indicates that the ball has not been entered into the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 65b even though the entrance sensor 640a has detected entrance. When (N1) and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f do not coincide with each other, a pseudo continuous variation effect is performed, and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be updated. From the player's point of view, it can be shown that the pseudo-holding symbols based on the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are consumed and a pseudo continuous variation effect is performed, and the special symbol 1 number of held balls When correcting the discrepancy between the value of the counter (N1) and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort felt by the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the stop symbol replacement period (S2406: No), the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command and the display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command are sequentially set (S2408). The pseudo continuous variation effect that is executed by consuming the pseudo hold symbol as the next variation effect is set by the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command set here, and the pseudo hold symbol is displayed by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command. The display is updated. As a result, even if the stop symbol cannot be replaced, a pseudo continuous variation effect that is executed by consuming a pseudo-pending symbol is set as the next variation effect. A mismatch between the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be corrected.

  In the processing of S2409 executed after the processing of S2401, S2404, S2407, or S2408, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is on (1) (S2409). If it is determined that the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is on (1) (S2409: Yes), the same process as that of the special figure 1 described above with respect to the special figure 2 is performed (S2410 to S2416). If it is determined that the winning flag 223i is not on (1) (S2409: No), the processing of S2410 to S2416 is skipped and the present processing is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag or the special figure 2 advance prize flag is turned on (1) (S2301: No), the predetermined period after the pseudo continuous fluctuation starts. It is determined whether or not elapses (S2303). If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous variation (S2303: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of pseudo continuous variation (S2303: Yes), pseudo continuous variation stop processing is executed to determine the stop mode of pseudo continuous variation (S2304). .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the pseudo continuous variation stop process (S2304) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process (S2304). The pseudo continuous variation stop process (S2304) is a process for determining a stop mode of the pseudo continuous variation effect.

  In the pseudo continuous variation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a suspension of continuous variation (S2501). If it is determined in the processing of S2502 that there is a continuous variation hold (S2501: Yes), a display stop type command is set with a stop symbol of pseudo continuous variation display (S2502). Thereby, a continuous variation effect can be executed by the pseudo continuous variation effect in which the variation effect is started and the variation effect executed in the next hold.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no continuous variation hold (S2501: No), a display stop type command is set with a normal variation display stop symbol (S2503). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the continuous variation display is not started even though the continuous variation display stop symbol is displayed.

  Note that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is possible to identify that the passing game ball is distributed (in the first entrance slot 64a, a sound effect of “Pew”, At the second entrance 64b, a sound effect “boone” is output. Thereby, it is possible to determine which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b is entered at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage.

  Furthermore, even when the game ball passes through the passage opening as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage opening and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance opening, even if the production symbol is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the time difference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is determined to which entry the game ball is distributed, and the effect design is displayed at the corresponding position, and then the effect design is displayed. Since the holding symbol is displayed and varied, the player can feel as if the holding ball is increasing at the timing when it passes through the passage opening. Therefore, a player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same for the hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a merged manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbol and the reserved symbol may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to a production pattern in which a drop falls at the timing when it passes through the passage opening, and then an image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the entry determination period, and the first entry opening 64a or At the timing of entering the second entrance 64b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from within the drop and the drop may be hidden. If the ball is not entered into the entrance, the character is not displayed and the drop display mode is not displayed. Thereby, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation of whether the fairy is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of pseudo-pending symbols is larger than the number of reserved symbols, it is determined whether pseudo-variation is possible within the changing variation pattern. In this determination, it is determined whether or not it is within a switchable period set in advance in the variation pattern. Therefore, when a difference is found, it can be quickly resolved if pseudo-variation is possible. In addition, when it is outside the switchable period, the pseudo-variation is executed in the subsequent and subsequent fluctuations, so that the problem that the difference continues for a long time can be suppressed.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, by setting the continuous notice in the variation mode of the pseudo variation with the variation pattern of winning, the player increases the expectation for the jackpot when the pseudo variation is executed. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is displayed in alphabet so that it is difficult to determine the number of reserved symbols, but may be displayed in other display modes. For example, a straight bar-like display may be displayed, and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by the difference in length. Further, the display of the reserved symbols may not be performed at all on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo hold symbol is the actual number of hold. In this case, the reserved symbol is notified by a frame lamp or the like (for example, a cherry petal character is placed and the number of the petals are lit). The number can be notified.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristic A group> (sounds when winning 8 chances)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, The storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and the storage number based on the storage of the first information or the second information. An identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol on the display means; and In a gaming machine having bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the selection means is a specific lottery result is displayed A passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a distribution means capable of alternately distributing the game ball passing through the passage opening into the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance And a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Based on the storage means that can store the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the storage means stores the first information or the second information. , Identification to display on the display means an identification pattern indicating the number of each stored Based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, a privilege game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player, And a passing port having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing port can be alternately distributed to the first entrance port and the second entrance port. A distribution unit; and a notification unit that notifies a notification mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage. Thereby, since the notification mode is notified by having passed through the passage opening, the discomfort due to the time difference between passing through the passage opening and entering the first and second entrances is determined by the notification mode. Can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, when a game ball passes through the passage, it is determined whether the passed game ball is distributed to the first entrance or the second entrance by the distribution means. A gaming machine A2 having a determination unit, wherein the notification unit reports a notification mode in which a determination result by the determination unit can be determined.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball passes through the passage opening, a determination unit that determines whether the passed game ball is distributed to the first entrance opening or the second entrance by the distribution unit. And the notification means notifies a notification mode in which the determination result by the determination means can be determined. Thereby, the player can know in advance whether the game ball can be distributed to the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily predict future game development.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on the fact that a gaming ball has passed through the passage, and the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on the passing of the game ball to the passage, so that the player can easily There is an effect that it is possible to determine that it has passed through the passage opening.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification means notifies a predetermined notification mode when a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, and informs the passage The notification mode to be notified when the game ball has passed is equal to or longer than the time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball has passed through the passage. A gaming machine A4, which is informed of the length of

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification means is predetermined when a gaming ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. The notification mode that is notified when the game ball passes through the passage opening is notified to the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage. Since the game ball is notified for a time longer than the time required for the game ball to enter, the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance at the timing when it passes through the entrance. Can make a player think. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic B group> (Provisional hold symbol is displayed at winning timing)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, Based on the display of the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player; A game machine having an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and alternately passing the game ball passing through the passage to the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the distribution means that can be used and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are separated by the distribution means between the first entry opening and the second entry opening. A discriminating unit for discriminating between which the game ball is distributed, a first informing unit for informing a first informing mode based on a discrimination result by the discriminating unit, and a game ball at the first entrance or the second entrance A gaming machine B1 comprising: second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Based on what has been done, a reward game that is advantageous to the player is granted. A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening alternately into the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game ball that has passed through the passing port is transferred to the first entrance port and the second entrance ball by the sorting unit. A determination means for determining which of the mouths is distributed; a first notification means for notifying a first notification mode based on a determination result by the determination means; and the first entrance or the second entrance And a second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on the game ball entering. As a result, in the first notification mode notified by passing through the passage port and the variable second notification mode, the game enters the first entrance port or the second entrance port. You can make the player think as if he entered the ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference between the timing when the player enters the passage and the timing when the player enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the first notification mode is notified of the first notification mode, the first notification mode is not changed to the second notification mode by the second notification unit even if the first notification mode elapses for a predetermined time or more. In the case, the gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the first notification mode is set to a non-notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, when the first notification means notifies the first notification mode, even if the first notification mode has exceeded a predetermined time, the second notification unit When the notification means does not change to the second notification mode, the first notification mode is set to the non-notification mode, so that the game ball that has passed through the passage opening enters the first or second entry port. This has the effect of allowing the player to recognize that he did not.

<Characteristic C group> (Pseudo hold symbol and book hold symbol are displayed respectively)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, Based on the display of the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player; A game machine having an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and alternately passing the game ball passing through the passage to the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the distribution means that can be used and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are separated by the distribution means between the first entry opening and the second entry opening. Determining means for determining which order is allocated, and decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative symbol display means, Based on the establishment of the start condition, the decorative symbol displayed first is not displayed among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit, and the dynamic display unit displays the start symbol. Based on the establishment of the condition, Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it is intended to initiate a dynamic display of different information.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Based on what has been done, a reward game that is advantageous to the player is granted. A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening alternately into the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game ball that has passed through the passing port is transferred to the first entrance port and the second entrance ball by the sorting unit. Determining means for determining which order is assigned to the mouth; and a decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative symbol display The means is configured to hide, from among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit, the decorative symbol displayed first, based on the establishment of the start condition, and the dynamic display unit Based on the establishment of the start condition, It is intended to start a dynamic display of the serial identification information.

  Thereby, it can alert | report that it entered into the 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance by the decorative design. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the timing of passing through the passage opening and the timing of entering the first or second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied, so that the player can easily recognize that the start condition is satisfied. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first entrance and the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second entrance displayed on the display means and the storage means are stored. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a difference determining means for determining a difference from the number of the first information or the second information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first entrance and the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second entrance displayed on the display means and the storage means are stored. Since there is a difference discriminating means for discriminating a difference from the number of the first information or the second information, it is discriminated whether there is a difference between the number of the first information or the second information and the number of the decorative symbols. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine C3, the difference determination means is equal to or longer than a time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage. A gaming machine C4, wherein the difference is discriminated based on a lapse of a reference time.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3, the difference determining means is configured such that after the gaming ball passes through the passage, the gaming ball is the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is determined based on the fact that a reference time longer than the time required to enter the mouth has elapsed, the game ball that has passed through the passage opening is the first entry hole or the second entry opening. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball has been entered.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference discriminating means discriminates the difference based on a game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. A gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference determining means is based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is discriminated, there is an effect that it is possible to discriminate whether the ball has entered the first or second entrance without passing through the passage.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the difference determining unit determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit. If there is a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information that is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information. When the start condition is set by the condition setting means, the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, and then the dynamic display is started again. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the difference determining means determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage means, And a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information, and the dynamic display means is configured by the condition setting means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. When the start condition is set, after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, the dynamic display is started again. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of decorative symbols and the number of first information and second information can be matched.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the decorative symbol display means includes the number of the decorative symbols displayed by the difference determination means in the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When it is determined that the number is smaller than the number, the decoration symbol corresponding to the small number of the first information or the second information is added and displayed by the number of differences, and the gaming machine C7 .

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st entrance 64b 2nd entrance 81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display means)
203 RAM (storage means)
640a Passage S105 Information acquisition means S203 Part of dynamic display execution means S402 Part of lottery means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the winning of a game medium at the entrance, a winning notification is made by outputting a winning sound or the like, and whether or not the winning is determined.

  For the purpose of distributing the flow of the game medium to the entrance, there is one in which an introduction channel for introducing the game medium to the entrance is provided.

  For example, in a gaming machine equipped with two types of entrances, it is possible to alternate the winning of game media to the two types of entrances by sorting in the introduction channel. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of preventing a ball from entering one side of the mouth.

JP 2012-231902 A

  However, in a gaming machine configured so that the player cannot visually recognize the inside of the introduction channel, the player cannot visually recognize the winning of the game medium to the entrance provided in the introduction channel, There is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable because the winning is notified by outputting the winning sound based on the game medium winning at the entrance.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a player's uncomfortable feeling.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance ball. acquires first information based on the game ball has entered the special unit, an acquisition unit for the game balls in the second ball entrance means acquires the second information on the basis of that the ball entrance, establishment of the determination condition in response to a determination means for performing determination based on each of the acquired first information and the second information by the acquisition unit, the predetermined time on the display means the identification information based on a determination result of the determination means a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, until said determination condition is satisfied, a memory means capable of storing said first information and said second information, respectively, by the determination result is specified by the determination means the identification information based on a determination result is displayed Based on the bets has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, a game ball game ball that has passed through the passing means having a ball entrance opening capable, the passage means and distributing means which can distribute alternately with said second ball entrance means and said first ball entrance means, said passage means based on the game ball has passed, the gaming ball is passed through the passage means Determining means for discriminating between the first entrance means and the second entrance means by the assigning means, and a first notification for informing the first notification mode based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means and means, based on the game ball to the first ball entrance unit or the second ball entrance unit has ball entrance, those having a second notification means for varying the first notification manner.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, when the first notification means notifies the first notification mode, the first notification mode has elapsed for a predetermined time or more. wherein if not variable in the second the second notification manner by informing means, in which the variable to be set to a specific notification manner the first notification manner.
The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the specific notification mode is a notification mode in which the notification of the first notification mode is stopped.

According to claim 1 the gaming machine described in the gaming ball first ball entrance means capable ball entrance and a different second ball entrance means and its first ball entrance means, a game ball to the first ball entrance means the first information acquired on the basis that the ball entrance, to trigger an acquisition unit, the establishment of the determination condition in which the game balls in the second ball entrance means acquires the second information on the basis of that the ball entrance, the a judging means for performing the determination based on each of the acquired by the acquisition means and the first information and the second information, the predetermined time on the display means the identification information based on a determination result of the determination unit dynamically displays a dynamic display unit, until the determination condition is satisfied, said memory means capable of storing first information and said second information, respectively, the determination result by the determining means is a particular judgment result based on that displays the identification information based on, Yu Who in anda benefits game execution means for executing a privilege game be advantageous, and passing means for playing ball having a ball entrance opening capable, that the game balls having passed through the passing means first ball entrance and distributing means which can distribute alternating means and the second ball entrance means, based on the fact that the said passage means gaming ball passes, game ball that has passed through the passage means, said by the sorting means A discriminating means for discriminating between the first entrance means and the second entrance means , a first informing means for informing a first notification mode based on a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the first ball entrance means or on the basis that the game balls in the second ball entrance unit has ball entrance, those having a second notification means for varying the first notification manner.

Therefore , there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the first notification means notifies the first notification mode, and the first notification mode is not changed to the second notification mode by the second notification unit even if the first notification mode elapses for a predetermined time or more. The first notification mode is variably set to a specific notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the game ball that has passed through the passage means has not entered the first entry means or the second entry means.
According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the specific notification mode is a notification mode in which the notification of the first notification mode is stopped. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the player has entered the first entry means or the second entry means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a distribution unit. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a judgment value per second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of these. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol 1. FIG. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol 2. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of big hit. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of a fluctuation | variation classification. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the display of a holding | maintenance symbol and an effect symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of normal time, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of entering a distribution unit. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation at the time of the entrance to a entrance, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation at the time of a ball entering judgment period. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the variable execution determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the advance winning detection process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the advance prize production process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect in case a ball entering judgment period passes at the time of a fluctuation | variation (it can replace). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the production | presentation when a ball entering judgment period passes at the time of a fluctuation | variation period (it cannot replace). (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of entering a distribution unit, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of a ball entering judgment period, (c) is It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation after a ball entering judgment period progress. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous variation process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation start process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous change stop process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the distribution unit 640. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  The inner frame 12 has a gaming board 13 having a number of nails, a winning opening 63, a sorting unit 640 having a right and right second entrance 64b2, a first entrance 64a and a second entrance 64b (see FIG. 2) is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize) to be described later are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64a, the sorting unit 640, the right second entrance 64b2, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning entrance 63, the first entrance 64a, the second entrance 64b, 64b2, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 in the distribution unit 640 are formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and the balls go to the second entrance 64b, 64b2. When entering a ball, the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a hit, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is opened, and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As will be described in detail later, the special symbol jackpot is determined by a dedicated lottery for each of the first special symbol jackpot and the second special symbol jackpot. If the first special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of jackpot A and jackpot B. If the second special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C (FIGS. 10A to 10B). reference). The specific winning opening 65a is opened as many times as the number of jackpot types. Further, after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the right second entrance 64b2 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the right second entrance 64b2. It becomes easy to do. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b2, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are three types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, and “Big Jack C”.

  When it becomes “big hit A”, “big hit B”, and “big hit C”, it becomes a special game state with the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot type. As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, specifically, the “big hit A” is a big hit (15R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open port) 65a is opened 15 times. Later in the short-time gaming state (period in which the special symbol has a low probability, the normal symbol probability is set to a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory becomes long, and the number of times of opening is set large), the special symbol starts to change 100 times It is set 100 times as a period until it is done. “Big Bonus B” is a jackpot (15R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is opened 15 times, and after the jackpot game, a probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability of a special symbol is set to a high probability ( High probability game state) is given 100 times (the number of times of special symbol fluctuation). Further, the “big hit C” is a big hit (2R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened twice, and 100 chance games are given after the big hit game. In addition, “probable jackpot A” and “big jackpot B” are also given a short-time game state of a normal symbol during probability variation games. Also, “big hit A” and “big hit B” are until the opening time of one round of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. The “big hit C” is set until the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is 1 second or ten game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the present embodiment, a small hit different from the big win is set with a predetermined probability in the case of a loss. When winning a small win, the specific winning opening 65a is opened twice. The opening time of the specific winning opening 65a for one round of the specific winning opening 65a is set until 1 game ball or 10 gaming balls enter in the same manner as the “big hit C”. As described above, it is difficult for the player to identify “big hit C” and “small win” from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, since “big hit C” and “small hit” are notified in the state (main chance) that the main symbol of “341” is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display the special symbol (third It is difficult to identify from the design. Further, the special symbol (first symbol) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is an LED or 7-segment display that is difficult for the player to identify, and is configured so that the jackpot type is difficult to distinguish. Yes.

  In addition, since a short-time game is not set after “big hit C” and “small hit”, it is difficult to identify whether it was “big hit C” or “small hit” in subsequent games. Thereby, even if the player is “small hit”, the game can be performed with the expectation that the “big hit C” is executed and the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state. . Thereby, the malfunction which a player gets tired of a game in the period until "big hit AC" is performed can be suppressed.

  Here, the “special symbol probability change gaming state (high probability state)” means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability has increased, so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol probability change), in other words, special symbol It is a game state that is easily shifted to the game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is referred to as a “normal game state of a special symbol (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. The jackpot probability indicates a normal state (a normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, and the Riu electric character is a game ball provided along with the second entrance 64b. Is a game state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the short time period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds at the jackpot according to the jackpot type Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery ends three times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed six times after the end, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the" big hit C "ends. The short state may be continued at this time.

  Furthermore, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the second entrance 64b or the electric symbol is released at one normal symbol hit. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become. Instead of the special symbol lottery count, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Here, the configuration of the sorting unit 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 640. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front surface side, and the cover body is made of a member that can be seen through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  In the upper part of the sorting unit 640, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type ball entrance sensor 640a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage opening is disposed. . The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entry opening 64a and the second entry opening 64b that are disposed below.

  The sorting member 900 receives the entered game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 640a, the sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball as viewed from the front (see FIG. 34A), and the game ball is moved to the first entrance port. Guide to 64a. Here, each of the sorting members 900 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees in the left and right directions, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 640, the magnet 901b of the sorting member 900 is disposed at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 is located at a position where the sorting member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b is located directly above (on the center line of a space where a game ball at the passage opening can be inserted by about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), there is no stopping at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly upwards. It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the sorting member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, so that the sorting member 900 is either left or right. It rotates and either of the accommodating part 900a or the accommodating part 900b turns to the side (game machine upper side) which receives the game ball which enters the distribution unit 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900b and causing a ball clogging.

  Further, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, after the housing portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, the storage portion 900b is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is received by the storage portion 900b. The sorting member 900 rotates about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second entrance 64b. As described above, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting unit 640 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls equally to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b, and to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as the first entrance 64a, which will be described later). The first lottery game) and the lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second entrance 64b can be efficiently executed.

  The right second entrance 64b2 is an entrance where the lottery of the second special symbol will be started when a game ball enters in the same manner as the second entrance 64b. In the second special symbol, the number of the holding balls is four, including the second entrance 64b and the right second entrance 64b2.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed through the left side can enter the passage port of the sorting unit 640 (size that allows one game ball to pass). The right second entrance 64b2 is configured such that only game balls that have passed the right side can enter.

  Here, FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped in a state where the sorting member 900 is rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the game ball is housed in the housing portion 900a, and the first entry port is guided while being guided to the guiding portion z1 by rotating the sorting member 900 counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball. A game ball is guided to 64a.

  After the game balls are distributed to the first entrance by the distribution member 900, as shown in FIG. 3B, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the housing portion 900c faces upward. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is housed in the housing portion 900c, and the game ball is distributed to the second entrance 64b. Therefore, it can distribute alternately to the 1st entrance 64a and the 2nd entrance 64b.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is newly made by the time the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot ends, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed after the jackpot of the new special symbol is over. The lottery is continued until 100 lotteries are completed. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 12 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, until at least 102 lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lottery performed after the new jackpot are finished, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol time-short state”, the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “normal symbol short-time state” is further increased to the new jackpot. After the end, it continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 64b, 64b2 (start winning prize) is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of variation, the special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the first entrance 64 or the second entrance The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the mouths 64b and 64b2, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81, and even when entering the second entrance 64b, 64b2, the number of entered balls is maximum. The ball is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b, 64b2 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of times of holding is 4 times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the big hit type. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds of jackpots in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is jackpot A or jackpot B, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the jackpot type. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds of jackpots in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. In the case of a big hit C, a chance eye composed of “341” breaks is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance chance is one type of “341”, but is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other random eyes, or one of the reach misses may be set as the chance eye. Good.

  Variation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol is set in the order of winning based on the priority set in the gaming state. The

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set so that only the 15th round jackpot is selected, and the second special symbol is selected. Then, it is set so that the jackpot of two rounds is selected with a probability of 40%. As a ratio of jackpots to shift to the high probability gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 80% respectively, and are configured at the same rate.

  Therefore, the first special symbol is set so that the jackpot advantageous to the player is more easily selected than the second special symbol. Here, since the distribution unit 640 wins alternately at the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed alternately. Is done.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a bias from being biased to one prize opening, and to prevent the player's damage from becoming excessive. It is configured so as to be able to suppress inconvenience that the performance becomes extremely high. In addition, since the frequency of the so-called over-winning, which exceeds the upper limit of the number of reserved balls due to being biased to one of the winning holes, can be reduced, even though a ball has entered the winning hole. The player's dissatisfaction due to not winning a prize can be reduced, and the game player's sales will not increase due to the turnover rate of the game being worsened by stopping the ball injection every time the player reaches the upper limit of the number of balls held. Can be prevented.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, the lower side is the main display area Dm that displays the 3rd symbol variably, and the other upper side is the holding ball. This is a sub display area Ds for displaying numbers and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are reserved balls that are the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. This is the area for displaying numbers. Specifically, in the small region Ds1, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and an effect symbol based on the ball entering the sorting unit 640 are displayed, and in the small region Ds2, the special symbol 2 is reserved. A reserved symbol indicating the number of balls and an effect symbol based on a ball entering the sorting unit 640 are displayed.

  Although details will be described later, when a ball enters the sorting unit 640, the incoming sensor is detected by the incoming sensor 640a, and an effect symbol is displayed on Ds1 or Ds2 according to the inclination of the sorting member 900 in the sorting unit 640. Is displayed. Thereafter, when a winning is made at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are “white circle symbols (see FIG. 5A)” so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be identified. The reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed as “white triangle symbol (see FIG. 5A)”, and the effect symbol is displayed as “white square symbol (see FIG. 5A)”. The symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integral symbol in the display area of the number of reserved balls, and based on the entry into the sorting unit 640, the integrated symbol is displayed. Since the effect design which is a part is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the reserved design is being displayed based on having entered the sorting unit 640.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and sometimes a notice effect is performed, for example, when a character appears. . In addition, it may be suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the reserved ball of the second entrance 64b is set in the same manner as the first entrance 64a.

  In this embodiment, the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 64b2 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls held is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, each of which includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each area, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is synchronized with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 64b2. Each value is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 64b2. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first per random number table 202a includes a first per random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability and a first per random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, The number of random numbers that are jackpots in the table is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the first per-random number table 202a1 (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability and the first per-random number table 202a2 (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability are stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 64b2.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol 1 If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 8B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 29” is the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b) for high probability. ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIGS. 9A to 9B). As shown in FIG. 9A, when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2. Becomes “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type of is “Big Jack A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 59” is “jackpot B”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot C”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 64b2.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110 (see FIG. 9A).

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D) includes, for example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disengagement (for a short time)”, “discovery normal reach” as variation patterns for removal. ”,“ Outgoing Super Reach ”,“ Outgoing Special Reach ”are stipulated, and the variation patterns for jackpots are“ Normal Normal Reach ”,“ Per Super Reach ”, and“ Perch Special Reach ”. Yes. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  There are 24 random numbers that are hit by a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e, normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, probability changing counter 203g, hour and minute counter 203h, counter buffer 203i, fluctuation execution flag 203j, and fluctuation order storage area 203k Other memory areas 203z are also provided.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (first special symbol), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64a, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when lottery of special symbol 1 is performed in main controller 110, each value of each counter C1-C3 stored in the reserved first area of special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sent to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first entrance 64a (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting win, winning information including those values is obtained. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the first entrance port 64a ( The only difference is that the first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the order of winning. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, other Shift processing is performed in which the winning data stored in the reserved area is packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time the ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value is 8. 1 is added (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display held in the special symbol 2) is held. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the ball number command (see S208 and S213 in FIG. 17 and S605 and S612 in FIG. 21). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs main control by a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls of the variable display held in the device 110 itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol normal display (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S805 in FIG. 23).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S706 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S803 in FIG. 23: No).

  The probability changing counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable change state, and if the value of the counter 203g during probability change is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability changing counter 203g has an initial value set to zero, and the main controller 110 sets the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the closing timing (that is, the jackpot end timing) in the final round of jackpot. A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 0 is set for “big hit type A”, and 100 is set for “big hit type B” and “big hit type C”. Thereafter, while the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S216 in FIG. 22).

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 18) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 19) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start processing or the special symbol 2 variation start processing, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the special symbol 1 variation start processing is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a2 for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to zero. In the main controller 110, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed at the main round final round (that is, the jackpot end timing). A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” and “big hit type B”, and 0 is set for “big hit type C”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is completed until the value of the hour / minute counter 203h becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203h is 0, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 22).

  The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. This flag is an area that is backed up even when power is interrupted, and the first special symbol is preferentially set in the initial state where the RAM is cleared.

  The change order storage area 203k is an area for storing a winning order for each piece of reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this change order storage area 203k, eight storage areas are set, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 9A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. Yes.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. In the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, a small hit determination value is set to “30 to 39”. On the other hand, no small hit determination value is set in the first hit random number table 202a for low probability.

  As a result, in the normal gaming state in which the first special symbol is preferentially changed, it is possible to prevent the small win from being established, and it becomes easy to identify that the winning two rounds are the small hit. Can be suppressed. Also, in the short time in the probabilistic gaming state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed, it is easy to win a big hit C. Therefore, by setting to win a small hit, it is a big hit C or small It can be difficult to identify whether or not it is a win, and the player can play for a longer time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9C) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type. . As shown in FIG. 9 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 dedicated to the first special symbol (see FIG. 10A) and a special symbol 2 dedicated to the second special symbol. And a selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 10B).

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected, and the value “1” of the first hit type counter C2 is determined as the big hit A determination value. “0-19” is set as “20-99” as the judgment value of jackpot B. Also, as shown in FIG. 10B, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is set so that the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be selected, respectively. The counter C2 value “0-19” is set as a jackpot B determination value “20-59” and a jackpot C determination value “60-99”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9A) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the normal symbol has a low probability (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9D) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11 (b)) when the success / failure determination result is a jackpot, and the success / failure determination. If the result is out of play and the game state is normal, a dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11 (c)) and the result of the determination is out of control and the game state is probable game state. Each of them is configured at least by a use (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D). In addition, although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table for a short-time gaming state is set.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a variation start flag 223d. A stop type selection flag 223e, a preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, a preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g, a special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h, and a special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i. Is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, each of the counters C1 to C3 which are winning information is provided. Each value is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64a, or variation display in a special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1610 in FIG. 31). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 held ball number counter. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a reserved ball number counter dedicated to the second entrance 64b, 64b2 (second special symbol), and is different from the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Since only the first entrance 64a (first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b, 64b2 (second special symbol), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 39). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the passage port when the sorting member 900 is oriented in the direction of distributing the game ball to the first entrance port 64a.

  The preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g passes through the passage opening when the sorting member 900 is directed in the direction of distributing the game balls to the second entrance with respect to the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223f. Then, it is different in that 1 is added.

  The special figure 1 pre-winning flag 223h is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage when the sorting member 900 faces in the direction to be sorted to the first entrance 64a. This flag makes it possible to determine whether a game ball has entered the first entrance 64a after the game ball has passed through the passage. In the present embodiment, if the player does not enter the first entrance 64a even after 3 seconds have passed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on, the player does not enter the first entrance 64a. It can be determined that the paper is discharged out of the sorting unit 640.

  The special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage when the sorting member 900 faces in the direction to be sorted to the second entrance 64b. This flag makes it possible to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the second entrance 64b after the game ball has passed through the passage. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the second entrance 64b even after 3 seconds have passed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on, the player does not enter the second entrance 64b. It can be determined that the paper is discharged out of the sorting unit 640.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Since details of the display control device 114 are known, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15, the display mode of the reserved symbols in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 shows the display timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before passing through the passage opening (entrance sensor 640a) of the sorting unit 640 and entering the first entrance 64a. It is a timing chart.

  FIG. 13A is a timing chart in the case where a game ball passes through the passage opening and then enters the first entry opening 64a before the entry determination period (3 seconds) elapses. In the small area Ds1, two effect symbols “white square symbols” indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage are displayed, and two “white circle symbols” that are reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed. (See FIG. 14). Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the passage opening, the sorting member 900 is in a state where it can be distributed to the first entry opening 64a in a state where the housing portion 900a faces upward. In the empty area of the small area Ds1, “white square symbol” is displayed at the position with the youngest winning order (see FIG. 14B). Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64a within 3 seconds, a “white circle symbol” which is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed inside the “white square symbol” (FIG. 15 (a )reference). When the white circle symbol is displayed, the effect symbol is continuously displayed until the reserved symbol is not displayed.

  As a result, the player recognizes that the fused symbol with the white circle symbol displayed inside the square symbol is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol. Therefore, it can be recognized as the effect that the reserved symbol is displayed until the white circle symbol is displayed after the effect symbol is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the hold of the first special symbol is displayed at the timing when the effect symbol is displayed, and can reduce the sense of incongruity due to the time difference until actually entering the first entrance 64a.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display timing of the display mode when the ball enters the passage and does not enter the first entrance 64a even after the entrance judgment period has elapsed. When the sorting member 900 is directed to the first entrance at the timing of entering the passage, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), an effect design is added to the small area Ds1 and displayed. To do. After that, if the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a even after the entrance judgment period (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Set.

  In this way, by making the effect symbol non-displayed at the timing when the entrance determination period has elapsed, it is possible to notify the player that the entrance has not entered the first entrance 64a. Therefore, the player can play the game while recognizing the exact number of the reserved balls.

  When the game ball passes through the passing port with the sorting member 900 facing the position where the game ball is distributed to the second entrance 640b, the effect symbol “white square symbol” is displayed in the small area Ds2. The In the second special symbol, a white triangle symbol is displayed inside the white square symbol of the effect symbol.

  Note that the position of the sorting member 900 is configured to be identifiable by the rotation sensor 990. In the present embodiment, the position of the sorting member 900 is determined by the rotation sensor 990. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the sorting member 900 may be determined each time by the entered entrance. . Specifically, based on having entered the first entrance 64a, the sorting member 900 is configured to determine that the storage portion 900c is facing upward. With this configuration, the position of the sorting member 900 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 900 is rotated by vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 900 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position every time the ball enters the entrance.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 27. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through-gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of times of holding N2) is acquired (S203). Next, a change execution determination process is performed in which it is determined whether the change sphere is executed with the reserved sphere of the special symbol 1 or the hold sphere of the special symbol 2 and the change execution flag 203j is set (S204). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process is the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205). If it is not the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205: No) ), It is determined whether or not the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in FIG. 2 (S210). If the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution (2) in FIG. 2 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206) and is changed by the calculation. The reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S207). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S205, if the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution (1) in FIG. 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in FIG. S210) If the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same process as the process for the special sphere 1 reserved sphere described above is performed for the special sphere 2 reserved sphere. Do.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. 2 Fluctuation start processing is executed (S214). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 19 or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, the stop symbol of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is set. More specifically, when the special symbol 1 is a big hit, whether the big hit A, the big hit B or the big hit C is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, the special hit 1 is determined. If the symbol 2 is a big hit, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, the special symbol display (the result of the current lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S219), and the process proceeds to S224.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0 (S220). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222: Yes), the hour / hour counter 203h is determined. 1 is subtracted (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S224.

  In the process of S224 executed after the process of S219, S222, or S223, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the variable stop (S224).

  Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). The first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is used. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the variation execution flag 203j (S301), and data in the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Thereafter, the data in the change order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → holding third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted such as the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (1) (S304).

  If it is determined in the process of S304 that the execution area data is special figure 1 (1) (S304: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution (1) in special figure 1 (S305). This process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution area data is not the special figure 1 (1) (S304: No), it is determined whether the execution area data is the special figure 2 (2) (S306). When it is determined in the process of S306 that the execution area data is special figure 2 (2) (S306: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (S307), and this process To return to the special symbol variation process.

  If it is determined in the process of S306 that the execution area data is not the special figure 2 (2) (S306: No), there is no holding ball to be changed and the variable execution flag 203j remains in the initial state. To return to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 change start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter of the special symbol 1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each value of C3 is acquired (S401), and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S402). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability changing is being performed, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability changing is not being performed. If it is determined in S402 that the probability change is in progress (S402: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (S403). ), The process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 9B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S403). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 399”, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 9B). ).

  On the other hand, when the probability changing counter 203g is 0 and it is determined that the probability is not changing (S402: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a. (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 9B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S404). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 39”, it is determined to be a small hit, and “40 to 399”. If it is within the range, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. In the process of S406, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit. When it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the special table 1 selection table 202b1 The display mode is further set (S407), and the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S408).

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b, and 3 Of the special jackpots of special symbols (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is determined that the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “20 to 59”, the jackpot It is determined that it is B (15R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “60 to 99”, it is determined that it is jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot) (see FIG. 10A).

  In the process of S407, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S408). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S408, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D). Specifically, if it is a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and super reach (60 seconds) if it is in the range of “51 to 179”. If it is in the range of “180 to 198”, it becomes a fluctuation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 11B).

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S406: No), a display mode of out is set (S409). In the process of S409, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the above. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out”, and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S407, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D). Specifically, if it is completely out of the range when it is not in the midst of a certain change, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, it is short out (7 seconds), and if it is in the range of “99 to 198”. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of “150 to 197”, it is super reach (60). If it is “198”, it will be a special reach (90 seconds).

  When the process of S407 or the process of S410 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined by the process of S407 or the process of S410 is set (S411). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S407 or S410 is set (S412). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (FIG. 26). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S412 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 variation start process, similarly to the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the first per random number counter C1 of the special symbol 2 acquired by the processing of S501 and the first per random number table 202a. A lottery result is acquired based on the determination value of the random number table 202a. If it is determined in the process of S502 that the probability is changing (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a ( S503) When it is determined that there is no probability change (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504). Thereafter, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S505), and it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S506).

  If it is determined in S506 that the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S506: Yes), the jackpot display mode is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501. (S507).

  The specific content is the first symbol display corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) in the same manner as the setting of the display mode at the jackpot time (S407) of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). The display mode of the device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set, and the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) is set as the stop type. In this embodiment, the setting in S507 is performed using a special figure 2 selection table 202b2, which is different from the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 used in the special symbol 1 jackpot display mode setting (S407). However, it may be set using the same table.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202d2 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S508), and the process proceeds to S511.

  On the other hand, in the process of S506, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out (S506: No), a display mode of out is set (S509). The specific content is the same as the setting (S409) of the display mode out of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209).

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d (S510), and the process proceeds to S511.

  When the processing of S508 or the processing of S510 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S508 or S510 is set (S511). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S507 or S509 is set (S512). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (FIG. 26). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S512 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S601). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Then, whether there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S603: No), the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is acquired (S606), and the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k is acquired. Special figure 1 (1) is set (S607), and the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the fluctuation order storage area 203k in the above-described fluctuation execution determination process (S204), the start opening fluctuates the special symbol 1 as in this embodiment, and the special symbol 2 Even when there are two types of fluctuations, the fluctuations can be started in the order of winning in the start opening.

  In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 64b (S608). When it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64b (S608: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is processed in the same manner as when the first entrance 64 is won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S609), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S610: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S611), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S612). Then, the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S613), special figure 2 (2) is set in the first area of the change order storage area 203k (S614), and this process is terminated. Note that the determination of the first area in S614 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S609.

  There is no winning at the second entrance 64b (S608: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S610: No), this processing is performed as it is.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S708). The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / hour state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S708, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S712: Yes). The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714: Yes) It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value (M) of 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Also, the number-of-holding balls command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) or the start winning process (see FIG. 21), the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 19), or the special symbol 2 variation process (see FIG. 20). ) Is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) and the sound lamp control device 113 are transmitted. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. This jackpot end setting includes the setting of the start of the special variable period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in rounds other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 20) ends, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) or the process of S721, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22), the second symbol display device 83 executes it. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S1001) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being jackpoted (S1201). Specifically, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) S219 is executed, and if the special symbol jackpot start is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1201, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning award (large opening) 65a of this time is the last round (that is, whether or not all of the jackpot rounds have ended) (S1207).

  When it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and values corresponding to the jackpot are set in various counters. It sets (S1209). That is, by setting 100 in the hour / short counter 203h, the normal symbol is set in a high probability state (short time state) from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. After setting various counter values, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1207: No), S1208 and S1209 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 34, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S1418 (see FIG. 29) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 29), it executes a power-off process in S1418. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1418 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1418, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1418, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1418 is executed (see S1417 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1418 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1308. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1311), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1308 is performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing S1402 to S1411. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1402 to S1411 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1412, the pseudo continuous fluctuation process of S1413, and the fluctuation display setting process of S1414 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, it is possible to detect the entrance by the entrance sensor 640a. Based on the command received by the command determination process, the setting related to the variable effect can be performed without delay by performing the setting related to the advance winning effect based on the command without delay. .

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1402). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later are set (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamps (Ds1, Ds2) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1412. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1412, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1412). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, in the advance winning detection process (S1411), an advance winning effect process for performing an effect based on the detected entry by the entered sensor 640a is executed (S1413). Details of the preceding prize effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1414). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1417), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the advance winning detection process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the advance winning detection process (S1411). This pre-winning detection process (S1411) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, there is a detection of the entrance by the entrance sensor 640a. In the case of winning, a winning effect according to the first winning slot 64a or the second winning slot 64b which is a predicted winning destination is executed.

  In the preceding winning detection process (S1411), first, it is determined by the incoming sensor 640a whether or not the ball has entered the entrance (S1501). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the entrance (S1502), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the entrance, it is predicted which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b the game ball will enter. As a method for predicting the winning prize destination, prediction is performed by calculating the orientation of the sorting member 900 from the tilt by a sensor (not shown) that detects the tilt mounted on the shaft of the sorting member 900. In addition, the detection of the direction of the sorting member 900 for predicting the winning prize may not be performed by a sensor that detects the inclination, and for example, a magnet and a Hall sensor may be used. In addition, as described above, since the direction of the sorting member 900 is alternated between the left and right in the prediction of the winning prize, the winning prize may be predicted based on the number of winning prizes, and in that case, no sensor is required. Can do.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the first entrance by the processing of S1502 (S1503), and when it is predicted that the ball will not win the first entrance (S1503: No). , The process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will win the first entrance (S1503: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 holding number counter is acquired (S1504). It is determined whether the value (SN1) of the acquired preceding special figure 1 hold number counter is less than a predetermined number (less than 4 in this embodiment) (S1505). If it is not less than the predetermined number (S1505: No), S1506 Step S1508 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 hold number counter is less than the predetermined number (S1505: Yes), 1 is added to the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 hold number counter (S1506). Thereafter, the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (S1507), the display special figure 1 advance prize effect command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  A winning sound is output in the sound editing / output process (S1409) of the main process (FIG. 29) in the sound lamp control device, based on the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h turned on in the process of S1507. As a result, a winning sound can be output at the timing when the ball enters the 640 that can be visually recognized by the player, so that either the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b in which the player cannot visually recognize the prize is displayed. It is possible to reduce the player's uncomfortable feeling compared to the conventional case where the winning sound is output at the timing of winning the crab. In addition, a ball enters 640 in which the player can visually recognize the effect as if the reserved symbol is lit (see FIG. 14 (b)) by the display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command set by the processing of S1508. Since it can be executed at the timing of the ball, compared to the conventional in which the holding symbol is lit at the timing of winning in either the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b where the player can not see the winning, A player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound output here is continuously output until it enters the first entrance 64a. If the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a, the game is stopped based on the flag being turned off after 3 seconds of the entrance determination period.

  When the processing of S1503, S1505 or S1508 is finished, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the second entrance by the processing of S1502 (S1509), and it is predicted that the ball will not win the second entrance. If (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will win the second entrance (S1509: Yes), the same processing as in the case where it is predicted to win the first entrance (S1503 to S1508) is executed. Specifically, the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is acquired (S1510), and the acquired value of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter (SN2) is less than a predetermined number (less than 4 in this embodiment). ) (S1511), and if it is not less than the predetermined number (S1511: No), the processing of S1512 to S1514 is skipped, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is less than the predetermined number (S1511: Yes), the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is incremented by 1 (S1512). The advance winning flag 223i is turned on (S1513), a display special figure 2 preceding winning effect command is set (S1514), and this process is terminated.

  Next, a command determination process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1412). This command determination processing (S1412) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1412), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main controller 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1602), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1603), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. If a variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). If a reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), a held ball number command receiving process is executed (S1608), and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1608) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1608). In the reserved ball number command reception process (S1608), first, it is determined whether or not the received reserved ball number command is the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 (S1701). When it is determined that the received held ball number command is the special symbol 1 (S1701: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 held ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1702). Thereafter, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b is set (S1703).

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1702. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203d. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, Or the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1703 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired (S1704), and the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is obtained (SN1). It is determined whether or not there are more (S1705). When it is determined that the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is larger than the acquired value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball counter (S1705: Yes), The value (SN1) is changed to the variable display hold count N1 in the special symbol 1 (S1706), and the process proceeds to S1707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is not larger than the value of the acquired preceding special figure 1 hold ball counter (SN1), the process of S1706 is skipped and the process of S1707 is performed. Migrate to

  In the processing of S1707, the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is acquired within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds in the present embodiment) after the special symbol 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on (1). It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is the same value (S1707). If the determination in S1707 is true, the special figure 1 advance winning flag is set to off (0) (S1708), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in S1707 is false, the process in S1708 is skipped and the process is terminated. Here, the special figure 1 pre-winning flag 223h is set to on (1) based on the detection of the winning by the pitch sensor 640a in the pre-winning detection process (S1411) of the main process (FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device. The preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is incremented by one. Since the main control device adds 1 to the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 by the winning at the first entrance after the ball is detected, and transmits it as a hold ball number command, the change in the special symbol 1 The number N1 of the display suspension is equal to the value (SN1) of the acquired preceding special figure 1 retention ball number counter. Therefore, by receiving the reserved ball number command during a predetermined period after the special figure 1 pre-winning flag is turned on (1), the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 and the acquired prior special figure 1 are obtained. If the value of the held ball counter (SN1) matches, the special figure 1 advance winning flag is turned off (0) on the assumption that there has been a winning at the first entrance 64 after detecting the entering by the entering sensor 640a. Set. If this special figure 1 advance winning flag is not set to off (0) within a predetermined period after the detection of the entry, it is determined that no entry has been made to the first entrance 64 after the entry by the entry sensor 640a. Can do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received reserved ball number command is not the special symbol 1 (S1701: No), the same processing as the processing of S1702 to S1708 is executed for the special symbol 2 (S1709 to S1715). Details of the processing are the same as those described in S1702 to S1708 described above, and are therefore omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. In the process of S1607, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1609). When the winning information command is received (S1609: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1610). Return to processing. In the process of S1610, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  If the winning information command is not received in the processing of S1609 (S1609: No), it is next determined whether or not a round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1611). When the round number command is received (S1611: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1612), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1613), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command is not received in the processing of S1611 (S1611: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed ( S1614), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted. Specific examples of other commands include the opening start command described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the advance winning effect process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the preceding winning effect process (S1413). This variation display setting process (S1413) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the first input is detected by the incoming sensor 640a. If no winning is made at the 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance, the display special figure 1 advance prize production command or the display special figure 2 advance prize production command is generated in order to change the display of the pseudo hold symbol. And set.

  In the advance prize production process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (1) (S1801). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on (1) (S1801: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S1802). The special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned off (0). After that, the display special figure 1 advance winning effect command is set (S1804), and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (1) (S1801: No), the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is turned on (1). It is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (S1805). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on (1) (S1805: Yes), the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S1806). The special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned off (0). Thereafter, the display special figure 2 advance winning effect command is set (S1808), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on (1) (S1805: No), the process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the variable display setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1414). This variable display setting process (S1414) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1907. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1902), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After the data is shifted, 1 is subtracted from the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f or the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g (S1906), and the process proceeds to S1907.

  In the processing of S1907, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1907). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1907: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1907: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1908), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1909).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911.

  In the process of S1910, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1911). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is possible to identify that the passing game ball is distributed (in the first entrance slot 64a, a sound effect of “Pew”, At the second entrance 64b, a sound effect “boone” is output. Thereby, it is possible to determine which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b is entered at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage.

  Furthermore, even when the game ball passes through the passage opening as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage opening and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance opening, even if the production symbol is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the time difference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is determined to which entry the game ball is distributed, and the effect design is displayed at the corresponding position, and then the effect design is displayed. Since the holding symbol is displayed and varied, the player can feel as if the holding ball is increasing at the timing when it passes through the passage opening. Therefore, a player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same for the hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a merged manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbol and the reserved symbol may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to a production pattern in which a drop falls at the timing when it passes through the passage opening, and then an image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the entry determination period, and the first entry opening 64a or At the timing of entering the second entrance 64b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from within the drop and the drop may be hidden. If the ball is not entered into the entrance, the character is not displayed and the drop display mode is not displayed. Thereby, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation of whether the fairy is displayed.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the effect symbol is displayed based on the detection of the entrance to the sorting unit 640 by the entrance sensor 640a. The effect symbol is configured to be an integrated symbol with the reserved symbol displayed based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. Thereby, the player can be given an impression as if the reserved symbol is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting unit 640. If there is no entry to the first entry slot 64a or the second entry slot 64b within a predetermined period after the entry is detected (if the entry is made to the sorting unit but no entry is made), The displayed design symbol is hidden.

On the other hand, in 2nd Embodiment, based on the entrance detection to the distribution unit 640 by the entrance sensor 640a, the small area | region which respond | corresponds the pseudo on hold design which is a design for suggesting the number of on hold balls artificially Displayed on Ds1 and Ds2. The reserved symbol displayed based on the entry to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is displayed in the small area Ds3, which is the lower left area of the main display area Dm, and the player determines the number of holds. Identification information that is difficult to recognize is displayed (see FIGS. 37A to 37C). (In this embodiment, “A” is displayed when the number of reserved balls is one, “B” when the number is two, “C” when three, and “D” when four. To do.)
If there is no entry to the first entry slot 64a or the second entry slot 64b within a predetermined period after the entry is detected, the pseudo-holding symbol once displayed is pseudo-displayed. By executing the variable display, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player when the pseudo-pending symbols are not displayed.

  This is because, for a player who has the impression that it is a reserved symbol with respect to the pseudo reserved symbol that is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting unit 640, the pseudo reserved symbol is not displayed (that is, This is because it is unnatural if the variable display is not executed when one of the holding balls is digested).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the configuration is included in the main process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The partial processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, processing executed by the main control device 110, and other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the display and variation display of the reserved symbol and the pseudo reserved symbol in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a period during which the variable display can be pseudo-stopped and restarted during the variable period (a replaceable period) is determined in advance for each variable pattern.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a case where it is determined that there is no entry to the first entry port 64a or the second entry port 64b within a predetermined period after entry detection in the changeable period during the fluctuation period. It is. Specifically, when there are two pseudo-reserved symbols and two reserved symbols for the special symbol 1 and there is a ball entering the sorting unit 640a, and the ball entering sensor 640a detects the ball entering, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The pseudo-pending symbols to be changed to three (see FIG. 37 (a)). After that, when it is determined that there is no winning of the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within the period of the entrance determination period a in the replaceable period, a pseudo stop display is displayed and the next A pseudo continuous fluctuation notice (pseudo continuous notice) suggesting that the change display executed and the continuous performance are performed is displayed (see FIG. 37B). Thereafter, the display of the pseudo-pending symbols is changed to two states, and pseudo-variable display is started (FIG. 37 (c)). When the pseudo variation display stops, the pseudo hold symbol and the display of the hold symbol are changed to one state, and the variation display based on the winning information of the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is started.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 36 shows that the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is entered within a predetermined period after entry detection in a period that is not the above-described exchangeable period (non-replacement period) during the fluctuation period. It is the figure which showed the case where it is judged that there is no entrance. In this case, before the next variable display to be executed, the pseudo variable display is executed, so that the variable display based on the pseudo hold symbol is displayed in a pseudo manner.

  Specifically, when there are two pseudo-reserved symbols and two reserved symbols for the special symbol 1 and there is a ball entering the sorting unit 640a, and the ball entering sensor 640a detects the ball entering, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The pseudo-pending symbols to be changed to three (see FIG. 37 (a)). After that, when it is determined that there is no winning of the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within the period of the entrance determination period a in the non-replaceable period of the change period, the change display being executed is continued as it is. Is done. After the change display is stopped, the display of the pseudo hold symbol is changed to two states, and the pseudo change display is started. When the pseudo variation display is stopped, one pseudo hold symbol and one hold symbol are subtracted and the display is changed to one state, and the variation display based on the winning information of the special symbol 1 is displayed. Be started. Here, when the pseudo fluctuation display is stopped, a pseudo continuous fluctuation notice (pseudo continuous notice) is displayed, which suggests that the next fluctuation display to be executed and the continuous production are performed. May be.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that both the pseudo hold symbol and the hold symbol which entered the passage could be displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. By displaying the pseudo-pending symbol as a symbol that is easily understandable to the player and displaying the pending symbol as a symbol that is difficult for the player to identify, the player can recognize the pseudo-pending symbol as if it were a reserved symbol. Therefore, since the pseudo on-hold symbol is added and displayed at the timing when it passes through the passage opening, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference until the ball enters the entrance.

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the passage opening does not enter the first entry opening 64a or the second entry opening 64b, the first entry opening without passing through the passage opening. When the ball enters the 64a or the second entrance 64b, a difference from the reserved symbol occurs.

  However, if the game ball that has passed through the passage opening does not enter the first entry slot 64a or the second entry slot 64b, the number of pseudo-holding symbols will be larger than the actual holding symbol, By executing the variation with the special symbol, the pseudo reserved symbol is digested one more than the reserved symbol. Thereby, a difference can be eliminated. In addition, when entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b without passing through the passage, the difference can be eliminated by lighting the pseudo-holding symbol in accordance with the holding symbol.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. First, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  Of these main processes, the processes of S1401 to S1412 and S1414 to S1419 execute the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1412 and S1414 to S1419 in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is done. Then, in the main process in the second embodiment, a pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) is executed instead of the preceding winning effect process (S1413) in the first embodiment.

  Next, the pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this pseudo continuous variation process (S1420). The pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) is performed when the entrance sensor 640a detects the entrance but does not enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 65b. This is a process for executing a pseudo continuous variation effect that performs a variation effect by consuming the pseudo hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the ball entry detection by 640a.

  In the quasi-continuous variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag or the special figure 2 advance prize flag is turned on (1) (S2301). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance winning flag or the special figure 2 advance winning flag is turned on (1) (S2301: Yes), the incoming detection by the incoming sensor 640a is detected. In spite of this, since it is a case where it did not enter the 1st entrance 64a or the 2nd entrance 65b, a pseudo continuous variation start process is performed (S2302), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the pseudo continuous variation start process (S2302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous variation start process (S2302). This pseudo continuous variation start process (S2302) is performed when the entrance sensor 640a detects the entrance but does not enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 65b. This is a process for starting a pseudo continuous variation effect in which a pseudo effect is performed by consuming the pseudo-pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the detection of the entrance by the entrance sensor 640a.

  In the quasi-continuous variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is on (1) (S2401). If it is determined that the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is not on (1) (S2401: No), the process proceeds to S2409. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is on (1) (S2401: Yes), the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is set to off (0) (S2402). Thereafter, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are acquired (S2404), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger (S2404). When it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is not larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2404: No), the process proceeds to S2409.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2404: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball The value (SN1) of the number counter 223f is changed to become the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2405), and it is determined whether or not it is a stop symbol replacement period (S2406).

  If it is determined that it is the stop symbol replacement period (S2406: Yes), a display pseudo-stop type command, a display pseudo-variation pattern command, and a display special figure 1 advance prize effect command are sequentially set (S2407). ). The variable display is pseudo-stopped by the display pseudo-stop type command set here (see FIG. 37 (b)), and the pseudo continuous variation effect is started by the display pseudo-variation pattern command (FIG. 37 ( c)), and the display of the pseudo-holding symbol is updated by the display special figure 1 advance winning effect command (see FIG. 37C). As a result, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter indicates that the ball has not been entered into the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 65b even though the entrance sensor 640a has detected entrance. When (N1) and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f do not coincide with each other, a pseudo continuous variation effect is performed, and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be updated. From the player's point of view, it can be shown that the pseudo-holding symbols based on the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are consumed and a pseudo continuous variation effect is performed, and the special symbol 1 number of held balls When correcting the discrepancy between the value of the counter (N1) and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort felt by the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the stop symbol replacement period (S2406: No), the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command and the display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command are sequentially set (S2408). The pseudo continuous variation effect that is executed by consuming the pseudo hold symbol as the next variation effect is set by the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command set here, and the pseudo hold symbol is displayed by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command. The display is updated. As a result, even if the stop symbol cannot be replaced, a pseudo continuous variation effect that is executed by consuming a pseudo-pending symbol is set as the next variation effect. A mismatch between the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be corrected.

  In the processing of S2409 executed after the processing of S2401, S2404, S2407, or S2408, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is on (1) (S2409). If it is determined that the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is on (1) (S2409: Yes), the same process as that of the special figure 1 described above with respect to the special figure 2 is performed (S2410 to S2416). If it is determined that the winning flag 223i is not on (1) (S2409: No), the processing of S2410 to S2416 is skipped and the present processing is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag or the special figure 2 advance prize flag is turned on (1) (S2301: No), the predetermined period after the pseudo continuous fluctuation starts. It is determined whether or not elapses (S2303). If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous variation (S2303: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of pseudo continuous variation (S2303: Yes), pseudo continuous variation stop processing is executed to determine the stop mode of pseudo continuous variation (S2304). .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the pseudo continuous variation stop process (S2304) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process (S2304). The pseudo continuous variation stop process (S2304) is a process for determining a stop mode of the pseudo continuous variation effect.

  In the pseudo continuous variation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a suspension of continuous variation (S2501). If it is determined in the processing of S2502 that there is a continuous variation hold (S2501: Yes), a display stop type command is set with a stop symbol of pseudo continuous variation display (S2502). Thereby, a continuous variation effect can be executed by the pseudo continuous variation effect in which the variation effect is started and the variation effect executed in the next hold.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no continuous variation hold (S2501: No), a display stop type command is set with a normal variation display stop symbol (S2503). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the continuous variation display is not started even though the continuous variation display stop symbol is displayed.

  Note that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is possible to identify that the passing game ball is distributed (in the first entrance slot 64a, a sound effect of “Pew”, At the second entrance 64b, a sound effect “boone” is output. Thereby, it is possible to determine which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b is entered at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage.

  Furthermore, even when the game ball passes through the passage opening as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage opening and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance opening, even if the production symbol is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the time difference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is determined to which entry the game ball is distributed, and the effect design is displayed at the corresponding position, and then the effect design is displayed. Since the holding symbol is displayed and varied, the player can feel as if the holding ball is increasing at the timing when it passes through the passage opening. Therefore, a player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same for the hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a merged manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbol and the reserved symbol may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to a production pattern in which a drop falls at the timing when it passes through the passage opening, and then an image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the entry determination period, and the first entry opening 64a or At the timing of entering the second entrance 64b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from within the drop and the drop may be hidden. If the ball is not entered into the entrance, the character is not displayed and the drop display mode is not displayed. Thereby, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation of whether the fairy is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of pseudo-pending symbols is larger than the number of reserved symbols, it is determined whether pseudo-variation is possible within the changing variation pattern. In this determination, it is determined whether or not it is within a switchable period set in advance in the variation pattern. Therefore, when a difference is found, it can be quickly resolved if pseudo-variation is possible. In addition, when it is outside the switchable period, the pseudo-variation is executed in the subsequent and subsequent fluctuations, so that the problem that the difference continues for a long time can be suppressed.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, by setting the continuous notice in the variation mode of the pseudo variation with the variation pattern of winning, the player increases the expectation for the jackpot when the pseudo variation is executed. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is displayed in alphabet so that it is difficult to determine the number of reserved symbols, but may be displayed in other display modes. For example, a straight bar-like display may be displayed, and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by the difference in length. Further, the display of the reserved symbols may not be performed at all on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo hold symbol is the actual number of hold. In this case, the reserved symbol is notified by a frame lamp or the like (for example, a cherry petal character is placed and the number of the petals are lit). The number can be notified.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristic A group> (sounds when winning 8 chances)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, The storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and the storage number based on the storage of the first information or the second information. An identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol on the display means; and In a gaming machine having bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the selection means is a specific lottery result is displayed A passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a distribution means capable of alternately distributing the game ball passing through the passage opening into the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance And a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Based on the storage means that can store the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the storage means stores the first information or the second information. , Identification to display on the display means an identification pattern indicating the number of each stored Based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, a privilege game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player, And a passing port having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing port can be alternately distributed to the first entrance port and the second entrance port. A distribution unit; and a notification unit that notifies a notification mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage. Thereby, since the notification mode is notified by having passed through the passage opening, the discomfort due to the time difference between passing through the passage opening and entering the first and second entrances is determined by the notification mode. Can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, when a game ball passes through the passage, it is determined whether the passed game ball is distributed to the first entrance or the second entrance by the distribution means. A gaming machine A2 having a determination unit, wherein the notification unit reports a notification mode in which a determination result by the determination unit can be determined.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball passes through the passage opening, a determination unit that determines whether the passed game ball is distributed to the first entrance opening or the second entrance by the distribution unit. And the notification means notifies a notification mode in which the determination result by the determination means can be determined. Thereby, the player can know in advance whether the game ball can be distributed to the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily predict future game development.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on the fact that a gaming ball has passed through the passage, and the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on the passing of the game ball to the passage, so that the player can easily There is an effect that it is possible to determine that it has passed through the passage opening.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification means notifies a predetermined notification mode when a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, and informs the passage The notification mode to be notified when the game ball has passed is equal to or longer than the time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball has passed through the passage. A gaming machine A4, which is informed of the length of

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification means is predetermined when a gaming ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. The notification mode that is notified when the game ball passes through the passage opening is notified to the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage. Since the game ball is notified for a time longer than the time required for the game ball to enter, the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance at the timing when it passes through the entrance. Can make a player think. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic B group> (Provisional hold symbol is displayed at winning timing)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, Based on the display of the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player; A game machine having an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and alternately passing the game ball passing through the passage to the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the distribution means that can be used and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are separated by the distribution means between the first entry opening and the second entry opening. A discriminating unit for discriminating between which the game ball is distributed, a first informing unit for informing a first informing mode based on a discrimination result by the discriminating unit, and a game ball at the first entrance or the second entrance A gaming machine B1 comprising: second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Based on what has been done, a reward game that is advantageous to the player is granted. A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening alternately into the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game ball that has passed through the passing port is transferred to the first entrance port and the second entrance ball by the sorting unit. A determination means for determining which of the mouths is distributed; a first notification means for notifying a first notification mode based on a determination result by the determination means; and the first entrance or the second entrance And a second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on the game ball entering. As a result, in the first notification mode notified by passing through the passage port and the variable second notification mode, the game enters the first entrance port or the second entrance port. You can make the player think as if he entered the ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference between the timing when the player enters the passage and the timing when the player enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the first notification mode is notified of the first notification mode, the first notification mode is not changed to the second notification mode by the second notification unit even if the first notification mode elapses for a predetermined time or more. In the case, the gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the first notification mode is set to a non-notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, when the first notification means notifies the first notification mode, even if the first notification mode has exceeded a predetermined time, the second notification unit When the notification means does not change to the second notification mode, the first notification mode is set to the non-notification mode, so that the game ball that has passed through the passage opening enters the first or second entry port. This has the effect of allowing the player to recognize that he did not.

<Characteristic C group> (Pseudo hold symbol and book hold symbol are displayed respectively)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, Based on the display of the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player; A game machine having an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and alternately passing the game ball passing through the passage to the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the distribution means that can be used and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are separated by the distribution means between the first entry opening and the second entry opening. Determining means for determining which order is allocated, and decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative symbol display means, Based on the establishment of the start condition, the decorative symbol displayed first is not displayed among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit, and the dynamic display unit displays the start symbol. Based on the establishment of the condition, Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it is intended to initiate a dynamic display of different information.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Based on what has been done, a reward game that is advantageous to the player is granted. A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening alternately into the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game ball that has passed through the passing port is transferred to the first entrance port and the second entrance ball by the sorting unit. Determining means for determining which order is assigned to the mouth; and a decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative symbol display The means is configured to hide, from among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit, the decorative symbol displayed first, based on the establishment of the start condition, and the dynamic display unit Based on the establishment of the start condition, It is intended to start a dynamic display of the serial identification information.

  Thereby, it can alert | report that it entered into the 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance by the decorative design. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the timing of passing through the passage opening and the timing of entering the first or second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied, so that the player can easily recognize that the start condition is satisfied. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first entrance and the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second entrance displayed on the display means and the storage means are stored. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a difference determining means for determining a difference from the number of the first information or the second information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first entrance and the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second entrance displayed on the display means and the storage means are stored. Since there is a difference discriminating means for discriminating a difference from the number of the first information or the second information, it is discriminated whether there is a difference between the number of the first information or the second information and the number of the decorative symbols. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine C3, the difference determination means is equal to or longer than a time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage. A gaming machine C4, wherein the difference is discriminated based on a lapse of a reference time.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3, the difference determining means is configured such that after the gaming ball passes through the passage, the gaming ball is the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is determined based on the fact that a reference time longer than the time required to enter the mouth has elapsed, the game ball that has passed through the passage opening is the first entry hole or the second entry opening. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball has been entered.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference discriminating means discriminates the difference based on a game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. A gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference determining means is based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is discriminated, there is an effect that it is possible to discriminate whether the ball has entered the first or second entrance without passing through the passage.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the difference determining unit determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit. If there is a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information that is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information. When the start condition is set by the condition setting means, the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, and then the dynamic display is started again. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the difference determining means determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage means, And a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information, and the dynamic display means is configured by the condition setting means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. When the start condition is set, after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, the dynamic display is started again. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of decorative symbols and the number of first information and second information can be matched.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the decorative symbol display means includes the number of the decorative symbols displayed by the difference determination means in the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When it is determined that the number is smaller than the number, the decoration symbol corresponding to the small number of the first information or the second information is added and displayed by the number of differences, and the gaming machine C7 .

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st entrance means 64b 2nd entrance means 81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display means)
203 RAM (storage means)
640a passage means S105 information acquisition means S203 part of dynamic display execution means S402 part of determination means

Claims (2)

A first entrance where a game ball can enter and a second entrance different from the first entrance;
Obtaining means for obtaining first information based on a game ball entering the first entrance, and obtaining second information based on entering the second entrance;
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means triggered by the establishment of the lottery conditions;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means on the display means for a predetermined time;
Storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine having bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. In
A passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter;
Sorting means capable of passing through the passage and alternately allocating the game balls to the first entrance and the second entrance;
Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passing port, it is determined whether the gaming ball that has passed through the passing port is distributed to the first entrance port or the second entrance port by the distributing means. Discriminating means to perform,
First notification means for notifying a first notification mode based on a determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine comprising: second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on a game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. . When the first notification mode is notified of the first notification mode and the first notification mode is not changed to the second notification mode by the second notification unit even if the first notification mode has elapsed for a predetermined time or longer, The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein one notification mode is set to a non-notification mode.

Images